drozdal

Kult - Inferno

Apr 14th, 2013
112
0
Never
Not a member of Pastebin yet? Sign Up, it unlocks many cool features!
text 344.80 KB | None | 0 0
  1. ÐÏࡱáys comes to man but that man can cheat
  2. death if he is very clever and very audacious. Fortunately I was both, and
  3. although Death has claimed my body more than once, my soul has persevered
  4. unscathed, and I remember everything from my previous lives. My earliest
  5. memories of life go back over three hundred years, and only four times has
  6. death interrupted an otherwise continuous train of experience. I can say
  7. with a fair amount of assurance that there are few alive today who have
  8. more intimate knowledge of death than do I.
  9.  
  10. Every man fears death, as I feared it once. But it terrifies me no longer,
  11. now I simply hate it. Some may say that hate seems an odd emotion to attach
  12. to a seemingly impassive fact of life, but this is a fundamentally naive
  13. view. Death is not a fact of life, but a curse placed upon us by our
  14. jailers. We are gods one and all, and only the treachery and deceit of the
  15. Demiurge and Astaroth have kept us from our birthright of immortality. Why
  16. the Demiurge felt the need to place this on us upon our race remains a
  17. mystery to me, but I know now that the curse is not insurmountable. There
  18. hope for humanity to escape the chains of Death and Hell exists, but the
  19. way is not easy. The Demiurge and his shadow Astaroth are jealous guardians
  20. of their power over man, and their servants will gleefully cut down all who
  21. might oppose them. It is to help others overcome these obstacles to
  22. immortality that I began working on this book over a hundred years ago.
  23.  
  24. I have always said that it is important to keep your friends close and your
  25. enemies closer, and when dealing with the servants of death this is a
  26. necessity. For this reason I have found it necessary more than once to take
  27. the harrowing journey into Inferno, and always I have come out unscathed.
  28. This manuscript is an attempt to impart to you what I learned during those
  29. voyages. But I have not limited myself to my own experiences. Painstaking
  30. research and personal interviews went in to producing this book, and you
  31. will find the fruits of those labors most interesting. I have included here
  32. the transcripts of many interviews with others who have plumbed hell and
  33. lived to tell the tale. These have proved invaluable for my sections
  34. dealing with Astaroth and his Death Angels, for while I am no coward, I am
  35. not a fool. One does not willingly cross the path of the King of Hell and
  36. his Dukes, but there are those who have managed to do so and survive at
  37. least long enough to tell their tales.
  38.  
  39. I ask that you try and learn all you can from these pages, for invariably
  40. someone died to produce every one of them. Learn from my labors and fight
  41. on for yourself, for herein is everything you need to fight the forces of
  42. Hell. I feel like Machiavelli, calling to his prince to take up arms
  43. against the barbarians, but I call out to every man, for we are Princes
  44. one and All. Do not let Death be the final arbiter for all men. Do not
  45. give in to the machinations of our jailers. Fight for your divinity, and
  46. wrest it from the clutches of Astaroth, or be a slave to mortality forever.
  47.  
  48. Sources
  49.  
  50. When I set about compiling this book all those years ago, I knew that I
  51. would have to rely a great deal on the work of others. I have given much
  52. care and attention as I have given to the study of Death and Inferno, but
  53. no man can know everything there is to know about such weighty subjects.
  54. Furthermore, I have always felt that first hand experience is a much more
  55. reliable guide than second hand guess work and interpretation. With this in
  56. mind, I have collected a large number of first hand accounts of Inferno in
  57. these pages, editing them only slightly in order to improve continuity or
  58. explain obscure passages.
  59.  
  60. I have here a wide variety of sources for my first hand accounts, and I
  61. would like to take a moment to comment on the different types represented
  62. here. They fall chiefly into two categories: those who have been to Inferno
  63. and gone on to tell the tale and those who have had visions of Astaroth's
  64. realm. The former are quite rare, but immensely valuable, and I have gone
  65. to great lengths to procure as many of their stories as possible. Still,
  66. this accounts for only a handful, as it take an extraordinary person to
  67. survive such an experience with their mind intact. In fact some of my
  68. sources did not have intact minds at all, but I was able to glean the truth
  69. of their tales from them.
  70.  
  71. Visions are much more common, and in fact have a long and well documented
  72. history, dating back to the beginnings of recorded history. Men and women
  73. under extreme duress often have glimpses of the afterlife that awaits them.
  74. Their souls become partially detached, and enter Inferno. However, because
  75. the detachment is not complete, they are not yet completely subject to
  76. Infernal laws. This allows them to wander freely through the realm, and
  77. often in random directions. They often see the most amazing things on these
  78. journeys. Of course if the body dies they may find themselves plopped down
  79. unceremoniously deep in the heart of Inferno, but if they survive they will
  80. bring their memories back with them to the world of the living. The
  81. experience is enough to drive a man quite mad, and often the brain will try
  82. and shut out such memories, dismissing them as hallucinations and telling
  83. oneself that it never really happened. But of course it did happen, and
  84. there are some who remember this very well. Others I have had to pry their
  85. tales from them using magic and hypnosis, but I think you will find the
  86. results worthwhile.
  87.  
  88. Finally there are those stories taken directly from the mouths of the dead.
  89. I am a more than capable Death Conjurer in my own right, and in the
  90. interest of learning and spreading the knowledge, I have summoned up and
  91. questioned innumerable spirits and Infernal beings. I have put forward the
  92. same questions over and over, working for hours on end at the thankless
  93. task I have set for myself. Dealing with a deceitful Razide can be a most
  94. trying experience, since one can be certain it has not interest in telling
  95. you the truth, but I have developed spells and rituals to force a Razide to
  96. tell the truth although even under its influence it will do its best to
  97. avoid a direct answer. This has produced some very interesting information,
  98. most of which I have included in this book.
  99.  
  100. In addition to Astaroth's demons, I have also spent a great deal of time
  101. talking to his prisoners. Those few who are sane enough to speak have told
  102. me such tales as would drive most men mad with fear. Being of stronger
  103. stuff than most men, I have listened to them all and taken careful notes.
  104. As with Razides, one can not be too careful when dealing with the spirits
  105. of the dead. They are almost universally bitter and resentful towards the
  106. living, and most find no delight in existence except for the prospect of
  107. you having to some day join them in Hell. Others are more than willing to
  108. tell their stories, and will in fact go on for hours given half a chance.
  109. Here for you are the choice tidbits of years and decades of such
  110. conversations, presented for your edification.
  111.  
  112. I have also combed through hundreds of libraries and private collections
  113. all over Europe and the Americas, looking for any records that might prove
  114. valuable. I have largely stayed away from literary sources because they
  115. tend to be wildly distorted views of Inferno's true nature. They are for
  116. the most part, part and parcel with the Illusion that binds us all (See my
  117. excursus on Dante below). There have been several personal journals that
  118. have proven invaluable in my researches, including the Laboratory notebook
  119. of a certain Dutch Death Conjurer who met with a rather mysterious end (as
  120. is true for so many of us). He himself had been to Inferno several times
  121. and had also collected some first hand accounts. Indeed, if he had not met
  122. an untimely end, his work may have rivaled even mine in scope and
  123. authority. As it is, he was able to provide me with a few interesting side
  124. notes.
  125.  
  126. Of course diaries, and journals must all be taken with a grain of salt, for
  127. there is seldom any way to prove their veracity. How can one tell the
  128. difference between the ravings of a mad man, and the ravings of an Infernal
  129. explorer? There are certain signs that point to a true story, and others
  130. that point to someone who has read too much Dante. Only through careful
  131. textual analysis and deconstruction have I been able to separate the wheat
  132. from the chafe and present to you accounts that at least point towards the
  133. truth of Inferno.
  134.  
  135.  
  136. Chapter One
  137.  
  138. Dante and Inferno
  139.  
  140. What can I say about Dante that has not already been said? Fundamentally,
  141. the critics are all correct, although they do not realize just how correct
  142. they are. They describe Dante as an amazingly inventive, imaginative,
  143. gifted poet, who used his scheme of hell to comment on his own times. This
  144. is the truth, and I believe the truth goes no farther than that. Certainly
  145. there are aspects of Dante's Inferno that bear a striking resemblance to
  146. modern day Inferno, but I rather think Dante was the cause rather of this
  147. phenomenon. Dante's vivid imagination has had so profound an effect on
  148. Western culture, that it has shaped the very form of hell. So many people
  149. have read of Dante's Inferno, that they come to expect his horrors, at
  150. least subconsciously. These fears so pervade our western consciousness that
  151. Astaroth and his minions have been able to use them to create their realm.
  152. What can be worse than finding out that, at least superficially, what Dante
  153. said of hell was true. If he was right about that, what else did he get
  154. right? Our own self doubt and inbred fears have already begun to undo us
  155. before the first tormentor lays a claw on us.
  156.  
  157. As proof, I offer the fact that, before Dante, there are no reports of the
  158. great Circles of Hell, at least not in their current, awe inspiring
  159. formation. Dante, expanding on Virgil, created this vivid image which
  160. managed to catch the imagination of even the Lord of Hell himself. I have
  161. looked long and hard for any sign of the Circles before Dante, and have
  162. talked to myriad spirits and demons concerning the matter, and none can
  163. offer any proof of their existence before the great Italian poet created
  164. his masterpiece. We know for certain that the form of Inferno is constantly
  165. changing, and that the Hells of other cultures bear little resemblance to
  166. Dante's vision, except for in the broadest of terms. This is further
  167. evidence of the mutability of Astaroth's realm. He can change it to suit
  168. the fears of every human culture, and will do whatever it takes to put us
  169. off guard and weaken our resistance to his tortures.
  170.  
  171. So where did Dante come up with his grand vision of Inferno? I assert that
  172. it was from his own very gifted brain and nowhere else. Some have argued
  173. that Dante did indeed harrow Inferno with the aid of a psychopomp in the
  174. form of Virgil. This is of course so much poppycock. There is absolutely no
  175. proof that Dante knew anything of the black arts, much less how to make his
  176. way bodily into Hell. Other suggest, more plausibly I think, that his
  177. visions of hell are a memory from a past life which ended with him being
  178. imprisoned for a long time in Inferno. While this is slightly more
  179. appealing, it seems to me unlikely, since it does little to explain his
  180. visions of Paradise, or his heavy reliance on classical authors for
  181. inspiration. I think the problem with this debate is that so many fail to
  182. believe that a single man could be so inventive and have such a profound
  183. impact on our entire civilization's view of hell. An impact so profound
  184. that it actually changed the shape of Hell itself. For those who have
  185. trouble believing such a thing I have but one response. We are Gods one and
  186. all, and for a God, anything is possible if the will is strong.
  187.  
  188.  
  189. The Cycle of Death
  190.  
  191. We human beings cannot die. This may seem contrary to all your experience,
  192. but in your heart you know it to be true. The hope for life after death
  193. shows itself in every culture, the belief that the soul lives on after the
  194. body. This is not mere myth, but rather a fact of existence. Truth be told,
  195. nothing is more natural. The human soul is an immutable, unconquerable
  196. force of nature, an eternal light that nothing and no one can extinguish.
  197. For you must remember always, we are gods one and all; gods imprisoned by
  198. the Demiurge's curse.
  199.  
  200. It is impossible to say what life was like before the Demiurge imprisoned
  201. us, for no one but the Great Jailer himself remembers back that far, and
  202. now even he seems to have disappeared. Nevertheless, we can guess at some
  203. of what the Age of Human Divinity must have been like. It seems likely that
  204. we are naturally bodily creatures, that is to say, we have always existed
  205. as a combination of spirit and physical form. The human soul seems
  206. invariably uncomfortable, or even anguished when separated from the body.
  207. Even in so-called paradise (on which I have more to say later) human
  208. spirits display a certain languidness and dullness, indications that they
  209. are not in their natural state.
  210.  
  211. We can also be fairly certain that in our heyday, humanity reigned supreme,
  212. reshaping the world to suit our needs and desires. The long lost lore of
  213. Reality Magic was the tool of our divinity, a lore so potent that all
  214. extant lores are mere shadows before its greatness. In a world where every
  215. man wielded such power with ease, nothing could have stood between us and
  216. total domination. Indeed, it is this fact alone that lends credence to the
  217. theory that the Demiurge was really just another human, who turned against
  218. his fellow man. In the Age of Divinity our bodies would not have been the
  219. frail liabilities they are today. Imagine if you will a body that was
  220. immortal and untouchable, with senses so sharp we cannot even imagine it.
  221. Such a body would be a blessing, and such is our stolen birthright.
  222.  
  223. Yes, there can be no doubt that we are meant to be creatures of the flesh,
  224. and it was part of the Demiurge's genius to turn that flesh against us. Our
  225. bodies became our Achilles heel if you will. For once the Demiurge stripped
  226. from us the knowledge of magic, we were no longer able to maintain our
  227. bodies properly and they began to decay around us. And so, for the first
  228. time, death came to humanity, and by death I mean simply the separation of
  229. body from soul. But we humans were not beat yet, for through sexual
  230. reproduction we could create new bodies, new temporary homes for our souls
  231. to reside in. Were this the end of the Demiurge's curse it would not have
  232. been so insufferable, for we could live on in new bodies, remaining our old
  233. selves.
  234.  
  235. But of course He was too clever for that. When creating the Illusion of our
  236. reality, he placed certain laws upon our prison, and chief of these was
  237. that when a body dies, the soul slips out of the Jail, away from possible
  238. new bodies that it might inhabit. The soul needs first to be purged of its
  239. memories, stripped of all it knows and is, flayed down to its base,
  240. insuperable essence. Only then is it allowed back into the Illusion, there
  241. to inhabit a newborn body with a soul as free of the taint of memory as the
  242. babe in which it abides.
  243. Of course, like all laws, this one can be broken on occasion. Magic, the
  244. interference of other beings, or just dumb luck can hold a soul back,
  245. trapped in the illusion yet unable to take a new body. But these cases are
  246. the rare exceptions that prove the rule. For the vast majority of mankind,
  247. only forgetfulness and the hope of rebirth remain.
  248.  
  249. It is said that the forgetfulness comes at the moment of death, our lives
  250. flashing before our eyes. This is really only partly true. For some the
  251. shock of death can be enough to wipe away the dull memories of an
  252. uneventful life. But for others it takes more, sometimes much, much more.
  253. Those of us who have led lives that exemplify everything a human can be,
  254. who strive for experience and self improvement, they have much to fear
  255. before the memories of our achievements are stripped from us. Beyond death
  256. there is the so-called afterlife, where our jailers set upon us and scrape
  257. away out memories layer by layer until nothing remains.
  258.  
  259. The actual process of stripping memories must be one of the most ironic
  260. aspects of the Demiurge's Curse, for in this, the most demeaning aspect of
  261. our imprisonment, he finds aid in his age old enemy: Astaroth. Astaroth,
  262. the Demiurge's dark twin, lord of Inferno, corrupter of mankind. It is
  263. Astaroth who takes charge over so many of men's souls, dragging them down
  264. into Inferno where the lucky get tortured until they forget all they ever
  265. were. These fortunate souls then return to the prison of our reality in a
  266. newborn body. The unfortunate ones never escape the clutches of the Dark
  267. Lord and his Angels of Death. They serve their lives out in the torture
  268. chambers and Dark Citadels of Inferno, or in the ranks of Hell's Legions.
  269.  
  270.  
  271. The Soul's Conscience
  272.  
  273. Now we turn what determines a souls fate once it leaves the body. We know
  274. that the ultimate goal is either the erasure of the soul's mind or its
  275. eternal enslavement. Curiously, we determine for ourselves the souls fate,
  276. at least to a degree. The concepts of sin, conscience, morality or what
  277. have you continually crop up in human society. The origin of such beliefs
  278. lies hidden in the history, but I would not be surprised if the Demiurge
  279. and Astaroth were behind it. Certainly their scheme has benefited most from
  280. the vagaries of human guilt and conscience.
  281.  
  282. It is our collective conscience that determines our fate. If we believe
  283. that we deserve to be punished for our life's work, if we feel we have
  284. sinned, then we are bound for Astaroth's arms. Those who lead an exemplary
  285. life, exemplary according to the reigning morals, these men and women
  286. escape to a less painful afterlife. What is important to remember here is
  287. that, it is not the individual beliefs of the man that determine whether or
  288. not he is a "sinner". He may logically believe that there are no absolute
  289. morals and that killing thousands is somehow justifiable, yet he lives in a
  290. world that views him as a monster. In his heart he knows what the world
  291. thinks of him, and even though he disagrees with them their hate leaves
  292. mark on his soul. Should his sins remain known only to him, it would make
  293. no difference, as long as he knows what the society of man would say about
  294. him, his soul becomes tainted with the Devil's mark.
  295.  
  296. Of course if man were to wake up and realize this, we could empty hell's
  297. coffers of souls forever. It is the unthinking fears, and cheap religious
  298. moralities of man that doom so many to Inferno. Society condemns them all
  299. to an eternity of torture. Yet we have seen instances where society can
  300. forgive a man sins that would be most heinous if another were guilty of
  301. them. War heroes, pop stars and kings seem to live under the aegis of a more
  302. forgiving morality. The general who orders the death of millions escapes
  303. the process guilt free, his soul untainted. Why? Because we humans say that
  304. his killing was right, his sins in fact virtues, and so with death he goes
  305. on to a better place.
  306.  
  307. Put simply, the sad but true fact of our existence is that if you sin you
  308. do go to Hell, a fact made worse by the fact that it does not have to be
  309. this way. But in the end, I suppose it hardly matters. Ultimately we are
  310. either stripped of all we were or become servants to our jailers. When we
  311. are reborn, we tend to become reattached to someone related to us. It may
  312. be the draw of the genes, or it may be our natural divinity reaching out to
  313. reform its lost body. Commonly, a human will also retain their same gender,
  314. sometimes becoming his own grandson or nephew. This is not always the case,
  315. and there are no hard and fast rules in reincarnation.
  316.  
  317.  
  318. Scouring the Soul
  319.  
  320. Our jailers have had millennia to develop tens of thousands of ways to
  321. scour the human soul of its memories. As I mentioned earlier, the more
  322. eventful our lives, the longer it will take to vaporize our memories. some
  323. men can look back on their lives and see a few highlights that stand out
  324. among a sea of dreck. Others look back on a single year in which they lived
  325. more than ten men. This has an interesting consequence for those of us
  326. judged sinners. It seems that sinners invariably lead more interesting
  327. lives than the dull or virtuous. Thus, a soul in Inferno tends to stay
  328. there much longer than a soul lost to the Demiurge's "Paradise".
  329.  
  330. The process of stripping our souls can take many forms. Astaroth and his
  331. minions prefer to lend the soul a physical form which they can physically
  332. abuse and torture. The number of tortures are legion, often especially
  333. tailored to the individual. The number of Razides available to perform
  334. these tortures is near limitless, and I will detail more about them later
  335. in the book. What matters for this current discussion is that Infernal
  336. tortures tend to rely on physical and mental trauma to destroy human
  337. thought and reason. In the so called "paradises", things are handled
  338. differently. There I'm told it is a process of pure stultification. The
  339. soul in paradise exists without stimulus, except for a feeling of floating
  340. in a pleasantly warm womb. The mind becomes numb to everything but the
  341. simple pleasure of its existence until all thoughts cease, leaving a clean
  342. slate.
  343.  
  344. When a soul falls into Inferno, it retains a semblance of it's physical
  345. form. That physical form is much more resilient than its living
  346. counterpart, and is capable of taking immense amounts of punishment. What
  347. would normally kill the body in our life, simply causes the damned soul to
  348. blackout in a short mockery of death. Moments later the body is reborn and
  349. regenerated, ready for a fresh round of torture. Of course, unlike true
  350. death, this Infernal death does not release you of any memories. In fact,
  351. it heightens the memories of your pain and degradation. Eventually, the new
  352. memories will crowd out all that you once were, and there will be nothing
  353. but pain and mental anguish left. Then the soul has truly been scourged
  354. clean, the mind broken. Eventually the pain and suffering become so
  355. commonplace that all the memories of agony blur together until the mind
  356. eventually fades into a permanent catatonic state from all the shock. Then
  357. the soul's time in Inferno stand complete, and the soul can safely be sent
  358. on to a new body.
  359.  
  360. When I speak of scouring the mind clean of thought and remembrance, I may
  361. be painting too vivid a picture, for there are certain things that make a
  362. permanent mark on the soul. I speak of course of the curses of conjurers
  363. and others, magical imprints that can stay with soul through all eternity.
  364. Likewise, powerful beings like Archons and Death Angels can place similar
  365. marks on the human soul. These curses and marks can effect the development
  366. of a new body, or act as a magnet for spirits, beings from beyond the
  367. illusion, or other malfeasances. While it is almost unheard of for such a
  368. mark to disappear while the soul is in the afterlife, I have heard rumors
  369. of such an event taking place. Perhaps it is within the power of our
  370. jailers to remove a curs, but they take some malicious delight in leaving
  371. the mark to haunt us in our next life. Although I would not put it past the
  372. Infernals to do such a thing, I think it more likely that such a feat lies
  373. beyond their power.
  374.  
  375.  
  376. Purgatory
  377.  
  378. There is no set place in Inferno that one can call purgatory, rather there
  379. are many thousands of purgatories, all of which are actually outside the
  380. bounds of hell. They are the realms of the Nepharites, Inferno's most
  381. accomplished tormentors. Throughout this book I have, and will write a
  382. great deal about Razides. Razides are by far the most common infernal
  383. being, and come in all shapes and sizes. There is another class of infernal
  384. that was once almost as common. Although their numbers never even remotely
  385. approached the populous Razides, Nepharites were once ubiquitous in
  386. Inferno. They were the master torturers, and only the most skilled Razides
  387. could hope to rival their abilities. Created by the Death Angels, the
  388. Nepharites were meant to be the perfect servants devote to torture.
  389. However, the Death Angels put too much of themselves in their creations,
  390. and soon the Nepharites grew ambitious. They sought freedom from their
  391. creators and from the constrictions of Infernal law.
  392.  
  393. Born with a lust for torture and pain far surpassing any Razide, the
  394. Nepharites were not content with the constrictive system of circles. They
  395. felt that each human's suffering should be entirely personalized, that the
  396. punishment should fit the crimes. They felt that the scouring process of
  397. The Pit lacked individual subtlety and nuance. The root of their
  398. dissatisfaction came from the simple fact that Nepharites are born to
  399. torture, and care not at all whether or not the memories get erased. In
  400. fact, the opposite is often true. They love to dredge up old memories that
  401. their victims have already forgotten and use them to inflict further pain
  402. and sorrow.
  403.  
  404. While Astaroth and the Death Angels still had a firm hold on Inferno, they
  405. were able to check the ambitions of the Nepharites. Under the direction of
  406. their masters, Nepharites could be very efficient torturers, scouring a
  407. soul much more quickly than most Razides. Even though they chaffed under
  408. the restrictions on their creativity, the Nepharites served and obeyed out
  409. of fear. Now Astaroth has all but abandoned his realm, and the Death Angels
  410. openly fight among themselves. Together, the Nepharites took advantage of
  411. the situation and have stepped out of the Infernal system entirely.
  412.  
  413. Now Nepharites operate on their own, outside of Inferno, and they have
  414. nearly cut off the flow of souls to many parts of hell. Nepharites have
  415. become the masters of the purgatories, private hells devoted to the torture
  416. of one human. Nepharites roam Elysium, seeking out those with a guilty
  417. conscience, waiting for them to die. When death finally comes, the
  418. Nepharite is there to capture the soul before it can slip into Inferno. The
  419. Nepharite then creates its own pocket universe, distinct from Inferno,
  420. Elysium, or Metropolis. There the Nepharite begins a sequence of torture
  421. that can theoretically last forever. The Nepharite concentrates upon the
  422. soul's feelings of guilt, reenacting the worst times in their life over and
  423. over again. There is no purpose beyond retribution for past crimes, and the
  424. only condition is that some part of the human feel guilty. It need not be a
  425. very large part, for a Nepharite can draw even the smallest hint of guilt
  426. into full-fledged remorse and self loathing.
  427.  
  428. The creation of the personal purgatories has become so common in modern
  429. times that few people go to Inferno at all upon death. This is a fact that
  430. enrages the Razides of Inferno, who have come to universally despise the
  431. Nepharites. Even the Nepharites who remained loyal and stayed within
  432. Inferno are now treated as outcasts and pariahs, shunned by other
  433. Infernals. The Death Angels care little however, and they are the only ones
  434. who truly have the power to bring the Nepharites back in line (excepting
  435. Astaroth himself of course). The Death Angels have always collected their
  436. souls through their own means, and their plans have suffered little from
  437. the Nepharite rebellion. There have been some organized attempts by demon
  438. lords to enter purgatories and seize the souls imprisoned there, but the
  439. process of finding and entering an individual purgatory is long and
  440. involved. Once the Razides gain access, they must deal with a Nepharite on
  441. its own soil, not an enviable task. Should they prove victorious, they have
  442. but a single soul to show for all their effort. The number of souls
  443. recovered in this manner cannot number higher than a few thousand. Thus the
  444. demon lords have taken to fighting among themselves, and delaying the
  445. passage of souls through the Circles.
  446.  
  447.  
  448. Paradise
  449.  
  450. I will take a moment here to begin where Dante ended: the much vaunted, yet
  451. highly overrated Paradise. As I mentioned earlier, Paradise lies at the end
  452. for those who lead a "virtuous" life, free from the taint of sin and guilt.
  453. Those who go to Paradise are those who played by the illusion's rules, went
  454. along with the jailers' moral precepts. This makes them the ideal servants
  455. for the head jailer himself, the Demiurge. So occasionally He would cull
  456. the most promising souls from their comforting wombs, turning them into his
  457. servants. For most though, there was only the pleasant suffocation of a
  458. false paradise before they got another shot at life.
  459.  
  460. Now the Demiurge has fled the world, his existence ever increasingly just a
  461. fading memory. Now the wombs of paradise go untended, the halls of the
  462. Demiurge's citadel stands empty. His servants the Seraphim, who once tended
  463. the mind washing of the virtuous dead, now wander aimlessly through the
  464. dusty remains of their master's former glory. Paradise was always a lie,
  465. but now it is even less. Now paradise is all but a myth. The sinless, the
  466. patsies of the great lies still go to the golden sleep, but this is no
  467. Garden of Eden. There they are simply and efficiently ground into mental
  468. dust underneath the Demiurge's great millstone.
  469.  
  470. You may detect in my discourse a certain disdain for Paradise. I ask that
  471. you look past my rhetoric to see the truth behind my words. At least the
  472. stories about Inferno ring true. The sinner knows what to expect, knows
  473. that tortures galore await him after death. But Paradise, Paradise is a
  474. great lie, a misrepresentation. Why lead a life free of sin and full of
  475. virtue when all that awaits is a glorified coma? But that has always been
  476. the Demiurge's way; brutal efficiency covered behind a thin veneer of lies.
  477. At least Astaroth has some imagination. At least the Father of Lies is
  478. honest about one thing. There are no illusions about Inferno.
  479.  
  480. Now please, read on as I move onto the meat of my opus, the work of several
  481. lifetimes. The terrors, mysteries, and great truths of Inferno await you.
  482.  
  483.  
  484. Chapter Two
  485.  
  486. Harrowing Hell
  487.  
  488. We move now from the logistics of death to the realities of the here and
  489. now. The Inferno of the late twentieth century is in a state of flux and
  490. chaos unheard of in all the history of our imprisonment. Now that Astaroth
  491. has left his domain for ours, the Gates to hell stand wide open. Even his
  492. children, the Angels of Death have grown remiss in their duties, and the
  493. brave man has much to gain in the pits of Inferno. This chapter is truly
  494. devoted to those for whom this book may be most useful: The Harrowers.
  495. Harrowers, those brave, foolhardy men and women who risk eternity to plumb
  496. the depths of Hell itself. They are, of necessity, an odd breed and few
  497. survive. A veteran Harrower is a sight not to be missed, although as often
  498. as not he or she will be wearing a straight-jacket.
  499.  
  500. Harrowers act the way they do for a variety of reasons. Tradition dating
  501. back to ancient times tales of brave men and women like Orpheus harrowing
  502. Inferno in search of the lost souls of their loved ones. Saving someone
  503. Else's soul has always been the most common reason for harrowing Inferno,
  504. and it is seldom effective. Only rarely can one find a soul before
  505. Astaroth's torturers have done permanent damage to it. Others enter the
  506. abysmal afterlife in search of answers to questions no living man can
  507. answer for them. Here again they are seldom successful, but when all other
  508. avenues have failed, desperate men take desperate actions. Then there are
  509. those who seek power for themselves, either in the form of Infernal
  510. knowledge of magic, or through capturing souls of their brethren, only to
  511. enslave them. Humans hunting for other human souls is more common than you
  512. might want to think. After all, the agonies of Inferno have already broken
  513. their spirit, and an enterprising conjurer can find many uses for a
  514. submissive soul.
  515.  
  516. How then does one get to Inferno without dying? That is our subject for the
  517. rest of this chapter and we begin with the study of those mysterious
  518. phenomena known as portals; breaches in the fabric of illusion that link
  519. our world with Hell. Several different kinds of portals commonly form
  520. between Inferno and our prison. Some exist for a short time only, while
  521. others become permanent gateways to the other side. These former are
  522. naturally enough quite rare, while the latter are surprisingly common. In
  523. my estimation, there are probably doors opening to hell every minute of
  524. every day, somewhere in the world. The circumstances required to create
  525. these portals are common enough, but there are few in the world who know
  526. enough to recognize a portal when they see one. It benefits a skilled
  527. necrologist to know the signs of a temporary portal and how to create one.
  528. You never know when such a skill might prove useful.
  529.  
  530.  
  531. Temporary Portals
  532.  
  533. The formation of a temporary portal can result from several different
  534. initial stimuli. These stimuli cause a breakdown in the illusory barrier
  535. between Inferno and our so-called Elysium. For a brief moment in time
  536. Inferno and Elysium coexist in the same place, and passage between the two
  537. realms becomes a simple matter of knowing which way to walk. Of course,
  538. most humans are too wrapped up in the illusion to understand what is
  539. happening under their noses. Remember, the two worlds coexist at that
  540. moment, meaning the area of the portal exists in both Inferno and Elysium
  541. so there is no physical change to the area of the portal. If a torture
  542. chamber becomes a portal to Inferno, that chamber exists both in Inferno
  543. and here, so when you walk out the door, you could end up in either place.
  544.  
  545. What determines where you go when you open that door? That all depends on
  546. who you are. A man knowledgeable in the ways of death, such as an
  547. experienced Death Conjurer or occultist will be aware of what has happened
  548. around him. In that moment, entering Inferno is a simple matter of will.
  549. One decides to be in Inferno and suddenly you are. Of course, this works
  550. the same way for Infernal beings on the other side, most of whom are
  551. invariably aware of new temporary portals in their area. They will often
  552. take the opportunity to step through into our world, either to take back an
  553. unwitting human, or to spend some time in our world wreaking havoc.
  554.  
  555. Those less enlightened individuals unfortunate enough to find themselves
  556. present when a portal opens have less choice in the matter. Where they end
  557. up is to some extents a matter of dumb luck and the individual's
  558. subconscious desires. Much in the same way a man's "sins" determine his
  559. fate upon death, an individual's feelings of guilt can determine whether or
  560. not he steps into our world or Astaroth's. Typically, those who have lived
  561. lives full of pain and darkness are much more likely to slip into Inferno,
  562. while more positive living souls manage to avoid such a fate. Of course
  563. there are no hard and fast rules here, and a lot of what happens depends on
  564. just how stable the portal is. It is not uncommon for a powerful stimulus
  565. to create a portal that is more Inferno than Elysium. In these extreme
  566. cases even the best of us has trouble avoiding the lure of Hell.
  567.  
  568. The experience of stepping through to the other side is often surprisingly
  569. unmemorable. It may be no different than one step is from another as you walk
  570. down the street. Certainly we have stepped into a land of eternal horror and
  571. pain, but often we are coming from a place in our own world that is not
  572. dissimilar. The are few differences between a torture chamber stinking of
  573. burnt flesh and blood and the outer chambers of Inferno. Indeed, it is
  574. likely that the area in Elysium is worse than the surrounding area in
  575. Inferno.
  576.  
  577.  
  578. Stimuli
  579.  
  580. I have gone on a bit about what happens when a portal comes into existence,
  581. but have yet to touch upon the true nature of what I call "Infernal
  582. Stimuli." A stimulus is an event that opens a portal to Inferno, usually a
  583. temporary portal. I exclude from my list of stimuli magical invocations and
  584. rituals which are something different all together. Stimuli are events of
  585. such horror and viciousness, that if you did not know better you would
  586. assume they occurred in Inferno. Of course men commit such acts all the
  587. time: murder, rape, torture, brainwashing, and so on. It is only natural
  588. that Humans behave thusly. Of course not every act creates a portal, in
  589. fact most do not. Only the most extreme cases produce a powerful enough
  590. stimulus, although there are still a surprisingly large number of temporary
  591. gates created every day.
  592.  
  593. A stimulus requires the expenditure of a great deal of mental anguish by
  594. someone or some group of humans. It is important to realize at this point
  595. that only human suffering can create rips in the Illusion. The Demiurge
  596. created Elysium as a prison to subdue human divinity, and only the
  597. torturous release of that divine power can create a rift. No exact formula
  598. exists to determine when a portal will form and when it won't. The
  599. suffering of one tortured soul can rend the fabric wide, while hundreds
  600. dying can result in nothing. There are probably a thousand factors that go
  601. into creating a true Infernal Stimulus, and it lies beyond my power to even
  602. hazard a guess at all of them, but below I have complied some of the more
  603. obvious factors.
  604.  
  605. Death: Every human death causes a breach in the fabric of the Illusion as
  606. the departing soul begins its journey to the afterlife. When a great many
  607. deaths happen in the same place at the same time, there is a good chance
  608. that the large number of souls passing on will tear a temporary portal in
  609. the barrier between life and death, creating a portal between our world and
  610. Inferno. There are a lot of factors that influence whether or not a portal
  611. forms, most importantly where the souls are going. If only a few souls are
  612. headed for Inferno, it is unlikely that a portal would form. A bus load of
  613. school girls and nuns going over a hill will not prove an adequate
  614. stimulus, where a plane crashing into a mountain with a variety of
  615. passengers probably will.
  616.  
  617. It is important to realize that once a portal forms, it typically only
  618. remains as long as the stimulus remains. So, in our example of the plane
  619. crash, the portal will only exist while the burning wreckage remains
  620. present. Once rescue crews come and clear everything away, the portal will
  621. in all likelihood be gone as well. This is why battle sites and war zones
  622. are often the scene of many Infernal Stimuli. With so many individual
  623. soldiers fighting, wounding and maiming each other, the suffering and death
  624. are constant, and there is little time to clean up afterwards. I estimate
  625. that in some extreme cases as many as ten percent of the casualties are
  626. actually men stumbling into Inferno or those snatched by Razides. These
  627. unfortunate men end up serving out eternity as soldiers in hell's legions.
  628.  
  629. Degree of Suffering: Suffering and anguish are the primary ingredients in
  630. creating an Infernal Stimulus, so naturally, the more suffering, the more
  631. likely it is that a portal will come into existence. This means that events
  632. like torture, heinous medical experiments, and prolonged acts of mental
  633. cruelty can greatly improve the odds of producing a portal, even if there
  634. is no death to weaken the barrier. Of course, prolonged suffering before a
  635. final, painful death has even more potency as a stimulus.
  636.  
  637. Human suffering forms portal to Inferno on a slightly different principal
  638. than simple death.
  639. Pure human emotional energy forms a link to Inferno, a remnant of our
  640. divine nature shining through in our darkest hour. Instead of our souls
  641. punching through the barrier on their way to the afterlife, our minds are
  642. literally tearing the fabric of reality to shreds around us in response to
  643. profound pain and anguish. Often this alone may not be enough to create a
  644. portal, but it may weaken the fabric of reality enough for others to break
  645. through. For this reason some death conjurers and Satanists like to include
  646. torture and sacrifice in their rituals.
  647.  
  648. As I mentioned earlier, the suffering does not necessarily have to be of a
  649. physical nature. Mental anguish can be just as potent, particularly if it
  650. is of the appropriate kind. Feelings of loss, hopelessness and despair are
  651. the most appropriate stimuli, but anger, hatred, and blind rage can also
  652. serve well. Of course we have all experienced these feelings in our lives,
  653. and as bad as we all sometimes feel, it is unlikely that most of us will
  654. ever experience enough mental anguish to create a portal to Inferno. It
  655. takes prolonged, intense mental suffering, usually by more than one person.
  656. Often it only serves to weaken the barrier between worlds, but sometimes it
  657. can break through reality. Such portals will only last as long as the
  658. source of anguish continues to suffer, although the portal may well move
  659. with the person.
  660.  
  661. Life Experience: We have already seen that the fuller a life an individual
  662. has led, the longer it takes to strip that person of their memories. This
  663. is one indicator that a more dramatic person has more energy to expend when
  664. suffering. A soul that takes a hundred years to purge obviously has more to
  665. it than someone who loses it all at the moment of death. It seems that this
  666. has a direct correlation to how likely it is that a portal will form. The
  667. suffering of a more extreme personality produces forces that rip through
  668. the Illusion with greater ferocity than the suffering of a simple man.
  669.  
  670. For example, I knew a man who lived a life of moral degradation and "sin"
  671. for years. He was a liar, a cheat, a murderer, and a pursuer of Occult
  672. Sciences. One fateful night his enemies (of which there were many) caught
  673. up with him in his temple, and proceeded to take their revenge on his own
  674. altar. Torturing this man had been underway for only an hour when all
  675. present felt the change. Inferno was creeping into the room, a portal was
  676. on the verge of forming. This was amazing to all of them, for all of them
  677. had tortured scores of men and women in exactly the same manner and never
  678. managed to produce an Infernal Stimulus. They proceeded and to their
  679. astonishment a strong portal formed. Unfortunately this allowed in a number
  680. of Infernal beings who had their own grievances with the unfortunate
  681. victim. Ultimately it was they who finished the job on our unlucky friend,
  682. with only one of the original torturers lucky enough to get away to tell
  683. the tale. I think this example speaks eloquently of how powerful a single
  684. tortured soul can be.
  685.  
  686. Mourning: Sometimes stimulus site or potential stimulus site will get an
  687. extra boost from the sympathy of others. Known as the mourning effect, this
  688. is often the case of disaster scenes and other public spectacles of
  689. suffering. Onlookers who may not feel enough sorrow to create a portal on
  690. their own may supply the added energy needed to either create a portal or
  691. keep one active for a long time. For instance, a site where many have died
  692. as the result of an exploding gas line may well create a temporary portal
  693. to Inferno. The fiery deaths of those in the building are potentially
  694. enough to shatter the Illusion for a short while, but not necessarily. The
  695. sorrow of the surviving relatives and those in the neighborhood continues
  696. on after the disaster, continuing to pour negative energy into the area.
  697. Heinous Nature: Another important ingredient in creating Infernal Stimuli
  698. is the heinousness of the instigating act. Here alone there may be room for
  699. art in generating a portal to hell, for the more malicious and disturbing
  700. the act, the more destructive energy released. Here I should mention a
  701. tendency towards novelty in the creation of portals, so that the more
  702. common the crime the less likely a portal is to form. In a world where
  703. murder on the street happens every day in every city, such acts have become
  704. integral to the fabric of our false reality. Thus they do not rip much at
  705. the fabric. The anguish of those involved can still strain the barrier,
  706. even if the crime itself is commonplace, but a new and exciting act can
  707. push a mundane horror to the level of the sublime.
  708.  
  709. The heinousness of the crime reflects the amount of effort put into it by
  710. the perpetrator. A simple liquor store robbery that turns escalates into a
  711. murder has little meaning behind it. Likewise a drunk driver running down a
  712. little girl in the street verges more on fate than heinousness, at least
  713. from an Infernal point of view. Should that girl's father hunt the drunk
  714. down, stake him to the basement floor and proceed to make him drink until
  715. the liquor comes gushing from the holes he has punched in the drunk's
  716. exposed liver, then mayhap we are talking about a true Infernal Stimulus.
  717. Here we have an act of profound passion, full of ill intent. The fathers
  718. own anguish, rage, and dare I say "inhuman" revenge all tear away at the
  719. fabric of reality along with the victim's own pain and suffering.
  720.  
  721. Sites of Sorrow: There are also certain places in this world where Inferno
  722. verges closely on Elysium, where the barrier is weak. Some of these places
  723. have become permanent portal for one reason or another (more on these
  724. later), others are areas where even the smallest stimulus can push the
  725. envelope of reality. The creation of such a place remains a mystery in many
  726. ways. There seems to be no logical reason behind it. Some places you would
  727. only assume to be close to Inferno are as far as away the Demiurge's
  728. Citadel, while an innocuous street corner might be only a step away from
  729. the depths of hell.
  730.  
  731. Typically, these sites are formed where there has been tremendous, chronic
  732. strain on the Demiurge's Illusion. Places like graveyards, the old
  733. battlefields, mental hospitals, and even hospitals commonly break down the
  734. illusion to one degree or another. These are places where the large number
  735. of departing souls over time weaken the structure of the Illusion, or where
  736. the constant release of sorrowful human energy has done the same thing. In
  737. fact, the ceaseless sorrow and death permanently alter the reality of
  738. Elysium in a small area, making recreating a part of our world in Inferno's
  739. image.
  740.  
  741. I mentioned curious areas where there would seem to be no obvious cause for
  742. a weakness to generate in the barrier between our world and Inferno. I have
  743. seen alleyways where not a soul has died but, which veritably wreak of
  744. Infernal taint, and pleasant fields where the slightest touch of horror
  745. opens the way for hungry Razides on the other side. Often these areas seem
  746. to be the focus of some great emotion from a distance, an emotion shared by
  747. a great many people. Perhaps the alleyway simply looks frightening to all
  748. who pass by, and the power of their dreams brings life to their fears. One
  749. can never be certain what forces are it work in any part of our world, but
  750. take note of any warning signs you think you see. If a chill runs up your
  751. spine for no reason as you walk on a beautiful beach under the noonday sun,
  752. take note. Inferno may well be closer than you think, and perhaps you can
  753. use this knowledge to your advantage.
  754.  
  755.  
  756. A Fatal Combination
  757.  
  758. Of course, in most cases one or more of the stimuli I have cited above come
  759. together to form the appropriate mixture of Hell on Earth. For those
  760. interested in creating their own temporary portals I have several caveats.
  761. Gaining access to Inferno through the use of spontaneously generated
  762. portals is the most dangerous means of travel to the other side aside from
  763. actually dying. If you really want to go to the other side, find a conjurer
  764. who can help you. This said, I know that sometimes necessity or passion can
  765. outweigh logical consideration. Therefore, I urge the would be Harrower to
  766. try and exert as much control over the Infernal Stimuli as possible. I mentioned
  767. that Heinousness of crime is an important ingredient, and this is certainly
  768. where you have the most control. It helps also if your victim is someone
  769. appropriately unbalanced, that is to say, full of divine human energy.
  770.  
  771. Creating a temporary portal is of course best done somewhere where the
  772. barrier is already weak. It is also best done with a partner, someone who
  773. can try and recreate the portal should this become necessary. Remember that
  774. while portals are two way, you cannot create them from the other side
  775. without magical help. If the portal closes behind you, you will have a hard
  776. time finding your way home. The issue of bi-directional travel brings up my
  777. final caveat: you never now what is lurking on the other side of things.
  778. Anything could be over there, up to and including Astaroth himself
  779. (although that is not likely these days). Always be on your guard. Always
  780. remember discretion is the better part of valor. Run lad, it may be your
  781. only hope.
  782.  
  783.  
  784. Permanent Gates
  785.  
  786. Now I turn my attention to a phenomenon somewhat different, yet still akin
  787. to temporary portals: Gates to Inferno. There is an important distinction
  788. here that probably are not immediately aware of; Gates are actually quite
  789. different from portals. Portals, as discussed above, are temporary events,
  790. places where Inferno and Elysium coexist for a time. I define any such
  791. portal as temporary, no matter how long it has existed. A temporary portal
  792. can last for centuries, but some day it will fade. Infernal Gates are
  793. something else entirely. They serve as direct passages from our world or
  794. Metropolis into the bowels of Inferno. Someone or something must actively
  795. create a Gate, using powerful magics of some sort.
  796.  
  797. First let me clarify exactly what I mean by a temporary portal as opposed
  798. to a Gate, for there is much confusion on this issue. Many people assume
  799. that sites where portals have existed for decades or centuries are in fact
  800. permanent gates. For instance, beneath the abandoned death camps at
  801. Auschwitz there is a substantial portal that has existed for over fifty
  802. years. The suffering there was so tremendous, the crime so heinous, and the
  803. mourning so continuous that the portal is likely to remain a long time,
  804. certainly as long as people mourn the dead and hate the Nazis.
  805. Nevertheless, it is not a true Gate to hell, and functions in the same way
  806. as any other temporary portal. That is to say, it exists both here and
  807. there, and it takes an effort of will, conscious or unconscious to travel
  808. from one side to the other. As we shall see, this is much different from a
  809. Gate.
  810.  
  811. A Gate acts just like a doorway, one need simply walk through it to come
  812. out on the other side. The Gate can take any form, and some do not resemble
  813. doors even remotely, although doors and passages are popular forms. I have
  814. seen corners of rooms, pools of water, boats, cars, and even empty fields
  815. act as Gates to Inferno. The experience of passing through a Gate varies as
  816. much as the forms themselves. Sometimes it can be quite dramatic, with
  817. flashing lights, fire, smoke, and the stench of sulfur. Other times there
  818. is simply a tingling sensation at the back of your neck, and the next thing
  819. you know hungry Razides surround you. There is no need for an act of will
  820. when moving through a Gate, something that makes them quite hazardous.
  821. Fortunately, such Gates are quite rare, and are usually in out of the way
  822. places where unsuspecting individuals are unlikely to stumble through them.
  823. Not that it does not happen now and then.
  824.  
  825. Gates are almost always bi-directional (although there are exceptions)
  826. making passage between our world and Inferno a simple matter for all
  827. involved. Truth be told, the Gates are used much more often by Infernal
  828. beings wishing easy access to our world. After all, there are few of us
  829. willing to risk life and soul for a walking tour of Hell. For this reason,
  830. the Gates often open right into particularly nasty areas of Inferno where
  831. Astaroth and his minions gather their forces. Almost invariably there is
  832. also a Gate Keeper of some sort, usually an Infernal beast set to guard the
  833. Gate from trespassers.
  834.  
  835. Gates are impressive pieces of magical architecture, requiring tremendous
  836. skill and commitment to create on a permanent basis. Creating a Gate means
  837. effectively blasting one's way through the false reality and the barrier
  838. between life and death, creating a small pocket of your own reality to
  839. connect the two worlds. Death Conjurer's can create their own gates through
  840. magical ritual, which are effectively the same thing only temporary (note,
  841. magical gates are different from temporary portals). For an unawakened
  842. human being to create a permanent Gate requires a massive expenditure of
  843. time and effort, accompanied by a profound knowledge of the occult Sciences
  844. and magical arts. Only a very few humans have ever managed such a feat.
  845. Astaroth and the Death Angels can create Gates with more ease, although
  846. even for them it can be quite an effort. Every dark citadel has at least
  847. one Gate linking it to Elysium, and sometimes many more. In these days of
  848. active Infernal involvement in human affairs, such gates are a necessity.
  849.  
  850. Gates are naturally a very efficient way of entering Inferno. The would be
  851. Harrower can take with him all the equipment, friends, and weapons he can.
  852. The Gates circumvent the problems of trying to create a temporary portal.
  853. Furthermore, a Gate has a definite end, that is to say, you can find out
  854. exactly where the Gate come into Inferno. Usually this is somewhere no sane
  855. man would want to be, but at least you know what you are getting into.
  856. There are however a few Gates that are not quite as dangerous as most.
  857. Places where Gates were made long ago for reasons now forgotten or by
  858. humans sorcerers willing to carry the fight for Human Divinity all the way
  859. to the Astaroth himself as necessary. These are Gates hidden away in the
  860. less traveled corners of Inferno, and perhaps afford a little more security
  861. for the adventurous Harrower.
  862.  
  863. I have complied here descriptions of some of the better known Gates as well
  864. as some virtually forgotten ones. Of course, in the case of the latter, my
  865. writing about them will no doubt bring them back to the attention of many
  866. who study and watch such matters, including of course Infernals. Still, I
  867. feel that the knowledge is useful, and the distribution of this tome
  868. relatively small. I make no promises about what I report here, except to
  869. say that everything is true to the best of my knowledge. Conjurers and
  870. Occultists created most of these, but they do not always control them
  871. anymore. As always, there are no certainties when dealing with Inferno.
  872.  
  873. The Shady Lady; Boston, Massachusetts
  874.  
  875. The Shady Lady rests at the docks in Boston Harbor, languishing in the same
  876. location for years. Nor is the ship likely to move, as iron piling sunk
  877. into ten feet of concrete protrude from the bottom hull of the ship,
  878. anchoring it in place. Dock fees are paid regularly, and the local
  879. constabulary paid to look the other way. The Shady Lady was once a simple
  880. cargo ship, plying Atlantic trade routes under an American flag. Christened
  881. in 1924, the ship survived German U-boat attacks and corporate takeovers
  882. until 1959 when it came to rest in Boston. It was then that a certain
  883. Teresa McCullen purchased the ship from a bankrupt import/export company.
  884.  
  885. The rusting hulk became Teresa's home, hideout, and temple. A powerful
  886. conjurer, Teresa used the unlikely abode to conduct some of the most
  887. innovative occult experimentations of this century. When I first visited
  888. the ship in 1968 I was amazed at what I saw. The interior of the ship had
  889. been completely converted into a warren of iron chambers, housing all
  890. variety of magical and mundane horrors. Teresa reigned as a queen over her
  891. ship and the otherworldly inhabitants she had summoned and bound to her
  892. will. Her final experiment was the creation of the Gate to Inferno. Her
  893. tunnel comes out deep within the circles of hell. near the Citadel of
  894. Hareb-Serap himself. Why she created such a dangerous thoroughfare is
  895. beyond me. Quite honestly I think she is mad. (Sorry Terri). As of this
  896. writing the ship is still there, and amazingly enough Teresa seems to live
  897. on unscathed. Always a generous soul, I am sure Teresa would offer use of
  898. her Gate to those who present themselves properly.
  899.  
  900. Dent Ranch; Jackson Heights, Utah
  901.  
  902. A curious thing about the modern world, today we have no problem blithely
  903. changing the face of nature. For some this is a cardinal sin against the
  904. environment, but I look at it as a good sign. It shows we are willing to
  905. change our reality, even if only in the most primitive sense. the damming
  906. of rivers for hydroelectric power is a fine example of this, for invariably
  907. the river before the damn swells up to form a huge stagnant lake. This
  908. happened on the Colorado river in the Western United States, and when the
  909. 120 mile long lake stabilized, several towns rested under its waters,
  910. including Jackson Heights.
  911.  
  912. Jackson Heights also happened to be the home of a rather sadistic Death
  913. Conjurer named Billy Dent. His ranch home along the Colorado River was the
  914. scene of many a Devil's Sabbat, and he housed a cult of Satanists here for
  915. many years. The closest town was a certain Jackson Heights, where the local
  916. residents (population 630) viewed their strange neighbors with some
  917. disdain. Nevertheless, Dent's cult existed for over eight years without
  918. arousing too much suspicion, and over that time they grew and grew, adding
  919. more buildings to the ranch complex.
  920.  
  921. Finally Dent made the big move, constructing a permanent Gate to his
  922. Master's home in Inferno. It took thirteen months to finish the Gate,
  923. culminating in a grand human sacrifice. For the whole period of the ritual
  924. the cultists were effectively cut off from the rest of the world, and never
  925. heard about the plans to dam the river only a few miles south of Jackson
  926. Heights. It was not until state and federal representatives cam around to
  927. appraise the value of the ranch that Billy learned of the future fate of
  928. the valley. In less than a year his whole ranch would be under several
  929. hundred feet of water, what is now known as Lake Powell. There was nothing
  930. he could do, and the cult was forced to move on to greener pastures.
  931.  
  932. Under all that water the Gate remains, a large stone carved arch, built
  933. within the ranch's barn. I have not been down there to see it, but there is
  934. no reason it should not be operational. It seems that Gates are not water
  935. permeable, otherwise the entire Colorado River would have drained into
  936. Inferno. Then again, it is possible that those on the other side had to
  937. seal up the Gate from their side. Billy tells me that he has not been back
  938. either, but that the Gate opened into one of the lower levels of Samael's
  939. citadel.
  940.  
  941. Club Khartoum, Rome Italy
  942.  
  943. Just off Piazza Barberini resides a hole in the wall bar and dance club
  944. called Club Khartoum. The reasoning behind the name is as mysterious as the
  945. goings on within, for there is little to link the place to Northern Africa.
  946. Here well off Italian youth gather to feel like they are acting
  947. dangerously. American rock music blares from the cement basement where live
  948. bands play every night. The upper floor houses a bar whose innovative
  949. interior design consists of black lights and encouraging the patrons to
  950. write on the walls.
  951.  
  952. I only stumbled on the Gate underneath Club Khartoum a few years ago.
  953. Amazingly enough, the Gate is simply a locked door just off the basement
  954. music venue. As you proceed down the stairs from the bar you pass by two
  955. toilets, one for men, one for women. Between the two is a locked wooden
  956. door, something one would assume to be a janitor's closet. As I walked past
  957. that old familiar sensation of dread washed over me. I examined the door
  958. closely, finally deciding that I had to find out what was behind it. The
  959. lock proved beyond my abilities to pick (which surprised me greatly) so I
  960. sought out the manager. He professed not to have a key, saying that no one
  961. did and that they did not use the room.
  962.  
  963. My curiosity piqued, I set to finding out all I could about the club.
  964. Unfortunately, that proved to be surprisingly little. A Swiss development
  965. corporation owns the building, but they bought it from an Italian realtor.
  966. Unfortunately the Italian realty office burned to the ground some years
  967. ago, destroying all records of the building. Another mysterious fire had
  968. destroyed any records about the building in the city archives. There seemed
  969. to be no records of the building anywhere, and I had other matters to
  970. attend to. Since then I have not been back, but I have managed to ascertain
  971. through magical means that there is in fact a Gate behind that door, and I
  972. imagine all that stands between the patrons and Inferno is a good crowbar.
  973. The Gate could easily date back to Roman times or even earlier, and if some
  974. brave reader discovers its secrets, I would be happy to hear their tale.
  975.  
  976. Chateau Renauld; Bordeaux, France
  977.  
  978. This centuries old winery nestled in the Margaux region of France's famed
  979. Bordeaux wine region has never been known for its great wines. Seldom
  980. exported, the high crop yields and dubious terroir is often harsh and
  981. overly tannic, although in good years it can be utterly drinkable. But in
  982. certain, rather exclusive occult circles, the winery is more famous than
  983. any first growth claret. The Renauld family are necromancers from way back,
  984. and since 1840 they have based their operation from their quaint vineyard
  985. in the heart of the world's best wineries.
  986.  
  987. It is possible that the Renauld's boast the largest cellar in a region
  988. renowned for its underground storage facilities. It is definite that there
  989. is in fact very little wine in the Renauld cellars. The occult minded clan
  990. has found more interesting uses for their underground labyrinth, which
  991. extends for some seven miles underground. Here the family Gate to hell has
  992. existed for over one hundred and fifty years, the product of years of
  993. careful experimentation and rituals.
  994.  
  995. The Renauld Gate is one of the best guarded doorways to Inferno controlled
  996. by humans. Some of the most powerful binding spells and wards known to
  997. magic are in place below the cabernet and merlot vines on the surface. The
  998. Renaulds are purported to make frequent excursions into Inferno, stealing
  999. souls out from under the Infernal Powers' noses and using them for their
  1000. own purposes. It is rumored that The Renauld's never allow the souls of any
  1001. of their kin to slip into the tortures of Inferno, and if all else fails
  1002. they will rescue them from the clutches of Astaroth himself.
  1003.  
  1004. Cave of the Python Mother; Celebes, Indonesia
  1005.  
  1006. Indonesia. If you have not been, go. Indonesia is a world unto itself, with
  1007. thousands of remote places where a man can be alone with himself and his
  1008. experiments. There are also scores of unique occult traditions in world's
  1009. largest archipelago, including several interesting Gates to Inferno. Of
  1010. these, the oldest and most interesting to me is the Cave of The Python
  1011. Mother on the island of Celebes. Celebes is a land even now relatively
  1012. untouched by modern society, and in the inlands, life continues as it has
  1013. for centuries. Python hunting is common on the island, where the serpents
  1014. can grow to well over twenty feet in length. The pythons can then be sold
  1015. on the world market as pets, for zoos, or skinned for their scales.
  1016.  
  1017. Pythons often live in caves, areas that have become almost sacred to the
  1018. python hunters. One cave in particular has a very fearsome reputation, a
  1019. place where even the braves hunter will not venture. Located less than a
  1020. hundred miles from the town of Boni, the cave is a well known site among
  1021. locals. Python hunters from miles around yearly make pilgrimages to the
  1022. cave, leaving sacrifices in the narrow opening. The typical sacrifice is a
  1023. live bound goat, which (it is hoped) will appease the Python Mother's
  1024. voracious hunger. It seems to work, for the Python has not been spotted in
  1025. centuries.
  1026.  
  1027. The cave itself has a relatively small opening. A man of sizable girth
  1028. would have trouble squeezing through the opening. The cave network itself
  1029. goes back for miles and is the home to all variety of insect and reptile
  1030. life. Centuries, maybe millennia, ago the cave seems to have been home to
  1031. some sort of intense magical experimentation. Indonesian wizards are
  1032. renowned for their skill and bravery in the face of otherworldly spirits,
  1033. and there are tales from across the archipelago of ancient sorcerers
  1034. breaking the bounds of reality. At some point one or more of these ancient
  1035. conjurers broke through into Inferno permanently.
  1036.  
  1037. As we all know, Gates are two way affairs, and in this case something seems
  1038. to have come through. An Infernal beast of fearsome proportions escaped
  1039. into our world and established itself in the area as the local demon of the
  1040. woods; killing livestock and stealing babies from their mothers arms. Who
  1041. knows if the beast remains in the region, certainly its reputation lives on
  1042. after it. It seems likely that whatever it was went back to Inferno, but
  1043. that is not to say that it does not return to our land from time to time.
  1044. The Gate itself appears as just another cave within the vast network of the
  1045. Python Mother, so spelunkers are urged to be careful. That next turn could
  1046. take you straight to hell.
  1047.  
  1048. The Gate opens deep within the outer wastelands of Inferno, far from any of
  1049. the great centers of dark power. This makes it an ideal Gate for those
  1050. wishing a less obtrusive entry into Inferno, although there is a long trip
  1051. ahead of you to the more interesting Infernal sites. There is also the
  1052. fearsome spectre of the Python Mother lurking in the background. Just what
  1053. the beast was, I am not sure. It seems from the legends that it was
  1054. something more than just a Razide out to make trouble. It may well have
  1055. been something otherwise unrecorded in Infernal Lore. Whatever the case,
  1056. the cave is worth a look for any committed occultist looking for a tropical
  1057. vacation.
  1058.  
  1059. Grove of the Golden Carp; Hunan Province, China
  1060.  
  1061. The Chinese love their carp ponds, and certainly there is a simple pleasure
  1062. in watching the placid fish swim in a shallow pool. Maybe its the
  1063. incongruity between the peaceful veneer, and Infernal purpose of the Grove
  1064. of the Golden Carp that makes it so very interesting. Centuries ago the
  1065. pool was part of a large garden belonging to an important Imperial Chinese
  1066. family, the Mu's. The Mu clan were among the most successful families in
  1067. the land, and in their heyday they had daughters who married emperors and
  1068. sons who served as high ministers. The wealth and privilege of their class
  1069. lasted until the tumultuous times of the twentieth century when the family
  1070. was slaughtered to the last man woman and child during the warlord era.
  1071.  
  1072. For a time their palatial county estate, encompassing the Grave and its
  1073. Gate, served as a base of operations for one warlord group until they were
  1074. driven out by the Nationalist Government. The Nationalists used it as a
  1075. retreat for the ruling elite, until the Japanese came and drove them out.
  1076. The occupying force had little time to develop the county estate, and
  1077. during the war it fell into disrepair. The Chinese Communist revolution
  1078. also managed to overlook the Grove, which had now become quite overgrown,
  1079. the buildings dilapidated. Today, over forty years later, the site remains
  1080. unoccupied, far from any signs of civilization.
  1081.  
  1082. The Gate itself lies within the carp pond, now cluttered with weeds and
  1083. bereft of fish. The shallow pond measures some thirty yards to a side,
  1084. forming a roughly square pond, bisected by a series of small footbridges,
  1085. now long since turned rotten. The bottom of the pool appears to be stone,
  1086. simple and remarkably preserved under sixteen inches of dirty water.
  1087. Towards the center of the pond there is a particularly large bridge, under
  1088. the center of which is a six foot diameter hole, unfathomably deep. This is
  1089. the Gate, located in a seldom traveled area of the pond.
  1090.  
  1091. There are various records of disappearances over the five hundred year
  1092. history of the state, leading to legends of ghosts and demons. No doubt
  1093. some of these were poor souls who fell through the Gate. Some may very well
  1094. have been ghosts, souls making their way out of Inferno and into our world.
  1095. Likewise, what is more demonic than an Infernal resident splashing out of
  1096. the pond to take what it can back with it? We can safely say then that the
  1097. Gate has probably been present since the fifteenth century.
  1098.  
  1099. Here's the problem though. The Mu clan is nowhere purported to be known as
  1100. magicians, conjurers, or the kind of folk who consort with demons. Even the
  1101. annals of the great Chinese sorcerers of the sixteenth and seventeenth
  1102. centuries fail to mention the Mu clan in any way, other than to note their
  1103. summer home as renowned for being haunted. So where did this Gate come
  1104. from? No obvious answer presents itself. Perhaps the Mu's unwittingly built
  1105. their summer home on top of the Gate, never realizing the threat that lay
  1106. beneath their fish. This seems the most likely explanation, but still does
  1107. not explain who was responsible.
  1108.  
  1109. One clue is the destination of the Carp Pool Gate: deep within Gamaliel's
  1110. citadel, not far from the Death Angels inner sanctum. Curiously though, the
  1111. Gate is no longer used by the Death angel or his minions. It is almost as
  1112. if the Lord of Perverted Sexuality does not even know what is beneath his
  1113. nose. Stranger things have happened I suppose. Perhaps the Infernal lord
  1114. created the portal himself ages ago and has since forgotten about it.
  1115. Perhaps not. I urge those interested to take a look for themselves.
  1116.  
  1117. Dunbar Research Station; Near Mt. Ras Dashan, Ethiopia
  1118.  
  1119. The Dunbar Research Station was fully funded and controlled by the powerful
  1120. biotech consortium LAMAR Biotech. I conclude with this Gate because it is
  1121. one of the most interesting examples of human curiosity and ingenuity going
  1122. far beyond any expectations. The research center, operating under far from
  1123. strict Ethiopian controls, devoted itself to finding new forms of genetic
  1124. medicines. That is to say (as I understand it) tailor made genes that could
  1125. cure diseases or heighten human well being.
  1126.  
  1127. In any event, the research seemed to open some particularly interesting
  1128. avenues in human development. Somehow a serum, drug, or some such potion
  1129. that heightened the awareness of test subjects, actually letting them see
  1130. beyond the Illusion. The testing procedures were very effective, although
  1131. far from kind, and many human subjects died or went irretrievably mad in
  1132. the course of research. The suffering of all these aware individuals was
  1133. enough to open a temporary portal to Inferno, something that did not escape
  1134. the notice of LAMAR scientists.
  1135.  
  1136. The portal intrigued the scientists, and they dropped all other experiments
  1137. to concentrate on the new phenomenon, something they thought was a doorway
  1138. to another dimension. They sought ways to stabilize the portal, free it
  1139. from the vagaries of human suffering. Somehow they did just that, and did
  1140. it without the use of traditional magical rituals, at least as far as I can
  1141. tell. The Gate is a permanent one, opening into the outer regions of
  1142. Inferno, very near to our own world. The Gate takes to form of a sealed
  1143. room, which instantly transfers anyone who enters its center to Inferno.
  1144. The Gate chamber is under constant guard and surveillance, and is probably
  1145. the most studied Gate in the history of our jail, even though it has only
  1146. existed for a few years.
  1147.  
  1148. It is unknown what governments know of the Gate's existence. Even the LAMAR
  1149. Biotech board of directors is unaware of its existence. The scientists in
  1150. charge now realize that it is not another dimension they have reached, but
  1151. the afterlife. They have sent several armed expeditions into Inferno, and
  1152. all of them have returned, although none unscathed. They even managed to
  1153. capture a Razide and bring it back for closer study, something I was
  1154. fortunate enough to witness. Access to the Gate is strictly limited, but it
  1155. may well be one of the safest entries to Inferno on the planet.
  1156.  
  1157.  
  1158. Periodicity
  1159.  
  1160. An interesting side note here, something that applies to both temporary
  1161. portals and even some Infernal Gates. Sometimes a portal or gate will exist
  1162. only at certain times or under specific conditions. For instance, a
  1163. temporary portal might appear on the anniversary of a horrible mass murder,
  1164. triggered by the mourning of survivors and even the suffering of those sent
  1165. to Inferno en masse. Gates might be attuned to specific dates or
  1166. astrological conditions, allowing the creator to have some control over who
  1167. comes and goes through their gate. A Gate that only works on St. Crispin's
  1168. Day or the Vernal Equinox is easily watched on those dates, and the rest of
  1169. the year there is no need to worry about unwanted Infernal beings walking
  1170. through to our world.
  1171.  
  1172. Artifacts as Portals
  1173.  
  1174. I have one more note on the subject of portals and gates. There are in this
  1175. world certain tinkerers who think that machines and clever clockwork
  1176. devices hold the answer to all the world's problems. Even among the ranks
  1177. of necrologists such individuals can be found. They create strange and
  1178. sometimes even wondrous devices that can open up temporary portals to
  1179. Inferno, or even temporary (and in a few rare cases permanent) Infernal
  1180. Gates. The devices come in all shapes and sizes, from small baubles, to
  1181. building sized contraptions. Almost all of them require complicated magical
  1182. rituals to create, although the amazing advance in science may soon find a
  1183. way to duplicate magic's excesses (e.g. the Terra Nova Research Station
  1184. above).
  1185.  
  1186. These artifacts are particularly dangerous because in many cases they are
  1187. portable, and so can fall into the hands of any fool. Some simply transport
  1188. the one who activates the device into Inferno, while others actually open a
  1189. portal or gate. The former cause the area around the device to
  1190. collocate-locate with an area in Inferno, while the latter typically create
  1191. a passageway of some sort. Where these open up in Inferno can either be a
  1192. random event or determined at the time of creation. Many tinkerers find it
  1193. enough to be able to create such devices and let them loose upon the world,
  1194. caring not a bit where the artifact sends its hapless operator. I myself
  1195. avoid the things like the plague, as you can never be sure of their
  1196. pedigree.
  1197.  
  1198.  
  1199. Chapter Three:
  1200.  
  1201. Infernal Travel
  1202.  
  1203. Later we will turn to some of the specific sites found in Inferno, but now
  1204. I will give some time to how travel in that land is accomplished. First of
  1205. all beware, for nothing I write here is set in stone. There are no
  1206. constants in Inferno. I can not over emphasize this point. What I present
  1207. here is a series of tips and comments, Infernal tendencies and likelihoods,
  1208. but never absolutes. A fact of Infernal existence that has existed since
  1209. the beginning of time is just as likely to change entirely in the next
  1210. minute as anything else. I make no guarantees.
  1211.  
  1212. First one must get there, which is why I have spent so much time talking
  1213. about portals and gates, methods whereby anyone can make the journey to
  1214. hell, should the mood strike them. Quite frankly however, I would not want
  1215. to rely on them and usually do not. The best way to get into Inferno is
  1216. through the use of magical rituals. Find a conjurer, pay him whatever he
  1217. or she wants, and trust them to see you through to Inferno and back out.
  1218. Conjurers have the great advantage of being able to control where in Hell
  1219. they are going when they create a magical gate. Even before they conjure up
  1220. the gate, they can look into Inferno and see the lay of the land before
  1221. they decide to make the move, thus avoiding the perils of blindly stepping
  1222. through a Gate.
  1223.  
  1224.  
  1225. Highways and Byways of Hell
  1226.  
  1227. Travel through Inferno tends to be undertaken on foot alone, for Gates
  1228. seldom accommodate cars or horse and carriage. Of course this is not always
  1229. the case, but certainly such forms of conveyance are rare down there,
  1230. especially outside the hands of the Infernal Lords and their servants. They
  1231. possess a bewildering variety of vehicles to carry them about their realm.
  1232. Bug-like, black steel ornithopters, mile long wheeled juggernauts that roll
  1233. across the Infernal Fields, sweeping all before them, demonic horses
  1234. pulling fiery chariots, and even devilish automobiles, festooned with
  1235. wicked spikes are all relatively common sights in Astaroth's domain. For
  1236. the hapless Harrower however, these conveniences are unavailable, and any
  1237. terrestrial vehicles are only likely to draw unwanted attention. I advise
  1238. you to keep to your feet. It may prove slow going, but it certainly
  1239. attracts less attention. Catching the wrong being's attention in Inferno
  1240. can damn you forever.
  1241.  
  1242. There are no cardinal directions in Inferno, so leave your
  1243. compass at home. With no magnetic poles there is nothing to draw the
  1244. compass, and of course marking your position by satellite locating systems
  1245. is totally impossible. It is doubtful that there even are constant
  1246. directions, nor are the laws of physics and time and space applicable.
  1247. Inferno itself is not a planetary body like the Illusory Earth, so it may
  1248. well be possible to fall off the edge. Certainly one cannot depend on two
  1249. parallel lines converging or a series of four left turns forming a circle.
  1250. Furthermore, things are constantly on the move down below, with even the
  1251. Dark Citadels themselves switching positions. It is said that Astaroth and
  1252. the Death Angels can warp and control the reality of Inferno, bending it to
  1253. their will. They can make a journey that looks to be just a few miles take
  1254. years, or let a single footstep cover a thousand yards. In their realm they
  1255. make the rules.
  1256.  
  1257. How then do the inhabitants manage to find their way around? Well, in some
  1258. cases they do not. There are those dumb beasts that wander the barren
  1259. plains and dusty halls of Inferno looking for poor defenseless souls to
  1260. torture. They are creatures of instinct and appetite only, roving from one
  1261. victim to the next. Then there are those human souls sentenced to an
  1262. afterlife in hell. Of course most end up in the torture chambers of the
  1263. Death Angels or in service in Astaroth's Legions. They usually appear as
  1264. battered and bruised humans, shadows of their former selves. Most are
  1265. totally mad, and best avoided, but some can become useful allies. Of course
  1266. always exercise caution in such matters, for as often as not these
  1267. "dejected souls" are actually Razides or other Infernals in disguise,
  1268. looking for unsuspecting victims.
  1269.  
  1270. There of course those who can find their way unerringly through Inferno's
  1271. twisted passages and foul waterways. It is a gift from Astaroth to his many
  1272. spawn, they know precisely where they are within the bounds of his Realm.
  1273. Always they seem to know just what lies beyond the next bend, even if it
  1274. was not there a few moments before. They know how long it takes to get from
  1275. one place to another, and what path is least fraught with potential
  1276. dangers. The most important exception to this rule is when Astaroth or one
  1277. of his Death Angels interferes directly with Inferno's shape. Then even the
  1278. most unerring of Infernal wanderers can lose its way.
  1279.  
  1280. This does not offer much hope for beings of non-Infernal origin, like you
  1281. and me for instance. Human souls have tried all manner of clever tricks to
  1282. try and find their way through Inferno's protean landscape. From ancient
  1283. times came the concept of Ariadne's thread, leaving a trail behind you
  1284. which you can follow back. Sadly, this seldom works, for as likely as not,
  1285. the thread will change with the landscape. Painted markings on walls
  1286. disappear. Bread crumbs are eaten. an innocent length of twine
  1287. metamorphoses into a serpent in your very hand. Infernal territory does not
  1288. take well to being marked, and the very soil on which you stand will react
  1289. against you.
  1290.  
  1291. There is one small ray of hope for man however: a human ability amazingly
  1292. potent, though seldom developed to its full potential. Divine beings that
  1293. we are, we too can shape the form of Inferno, at least to a degree. A very
  1294. small degree. Here is how this curious phenomenon seems to work. We know
  1295. that human suffering, pain, and emotion can bring Inferno and Elysium
  1296. together to form a portal. In that case human energy primarily rips apart
  1297. the Illusion, but it also draws Inferno to the location. Thus human
  1298. suffering and so on opens portals to Inferno and not Metropolis or the
  1299. Dream World. Thus we know that human divine energy can manipulate Infernal
  1300. geography.
  1301.  
  1302. Now do not get too excited, this ability is extremely limited indeed. No
  1303. man (except mayhap one of the Awakened) can blithely bend Astaroth's realm
  1304. to their will. Rather, humans can, if they are lucky and things go well for
  1305. them, slightly influence their path through Inferno. A strong willed person
  1306. can keep a destination in mind, and if he or she keeps walking, eventually
  1307. they will get there. Eventually. It may take years, it may take lifetimes,
  1308. but eventually it will happen. The stronger the will, the more mentally fit
  1309. the person, the closer they are to Awakening, the quicker their journey
  1310. will be. Where the mind looks, the body will follow.
  1311.  
  1312. There are of course several problems with relying on this method of travel
  1313. through the shifting Infernal landscape. First of all, how do you know if
  1314. you are strong enough? Look into your heart and think of the hardest fought
  1315. accomplishment of your life. Could you exert yourself to that degree for
  1316. days or weeks on end? Can you finish the journey once it is begun? Then of
  1317. course there is the goal itself. After all the technique does not work if
  1318. you do not have a place in mind, and hopefully that place still exists.
  1319. There are of course sites that are always there, (or so it seems, remember:
  1320. no guarantees) but certain sites are likely to be there, most of which I
  1321. shall discuss in the next chapter. It is paramount that you have a clear
  1322. picture of your goal at all times. This need not be an actual image so much
  1323. as a feeling and emotional attachment to the goal.
  1324.  
  1325. All this concentrating on a set goal has a rather sinister side effect. It
  1326. tends to draw unwanted attention. Of course in Inferno, all attention is
  1327. unwanted, so one must be particularly careful here. Setting the front door
  1328. of Samael's citadel as your goal in effect means making Samael himself your
  1329. goal, and the closer you get the more likely he is to become aware of your
  1330. presence. He will at the very least interfere with your progress, for even
  1331. his subconscious will throw up barriers in your path, and at worst he will
  1332. send his legions to find you and bring you back in chains. Likewise, other
  1333. Infernal beings in your vicinity will sense your effort and come to
  1334. investigate what all the excitement is about.
  1335.  
  1336. Let me make something absolutely clear at this point. When I say you have
  1337. to concentrate it has to be a site, not a place where someone is. You
  1338. cannot say to yourself, take me to the torture chamber where my beloved
  1339. dead wife is and expect to get there. If you somehow ascertained your
  1340. wife's location you would have to concentrate on that place, the Chamber of
  1341. Stinging Sorrows in the Third Circle for example. Let me also make this
  1342. clear: This is a very dangerous, seldom successful technique for navigating
  1343. Inferno, but it may have to do if you have no other option. Hopefully you
  1344. will, which brings me to my next subject: Pscyhpomps and their myriad uses.
  1345.  
  1346.  
  1347. Psychopomps
  1348.  
  1349. The psychopomp is a very refined version of the phenomenon I described
  1350. above. A psychopomp or spirit guide is a being who leads you through hell,
  1351. whether it be Dante's Virgil or Virgil's Sybil of Cumae. Psychompomps are a
  1352. must for any serious Infernal traveler, and they come in several different
  1353. types, depending on your resources and expertise. Here as in everything to
  1354. do with harrowing, magic proves itself profoundly useful. Although not
  1355. absolutely necessary in gaining the aid of a psychopomp, it makes the task
  1356. much simpler.
  1357.  
  1358. The most common psychopomp is not a true guide at all, but a projection of
  1359. the conjurer's own self. In a way this guide is related to the practice I
  1360. described in the previous section where the Harrower bends Inferno to his
  1361. will. However, summoning up a guide from your own repressed memories is
  1362. both more subtle and quite a bit more efficient. The conjurer looks back
  1363. through the depths of time, recalling all the times he has been to Inferno
  1364. before, although then it was as a dead soul and not a live Harrower. The
  1365. ritual does not grant the caster all his lost memories, such a feat is
  1366. beyond most of his. Instead it manages to pluck out those memories relating
  1367. strictly to Inferno and its layout. The memories then coalesce within
  1368. Inferno into a physical form: thus comes the psychopomp.
  1369.  
  1370. Of course the form of the memory guide varies from person to person. They
  1371. can assume most any form, from a identical twin of the caster to some
  1372. famous figure from history (Virgil?). Even animals and fantastic beasts can
  1373. serve as guides, although they are never much bigger than man sized. It is
  1374. important to note here that the guide has no real substance in Inferno.
  1375. Just because you conjure up a psychopomp in the form of a great warrior
  1376. does not mean it will or can fight for you. The advantage to this is that
  1377. they are almost impossible to destroy except by magic, unless of course the
  1378. caster himself should perish.
  1379.  
  1380. How much a conjured psychopomp knows varies widely, but it is usually a
  1381. fair amount. Most of us have spent many hundreds or even thousands of years
  1382. in Inferno over the course of history. Of course sometimes we can spend a
  1383. millennium locked away in a single torture chamber, but this is rarer than
  1384. you might expect. The odds are that your psychopomp will be able to take
  1385. you close to wherever you want to go, although mayhap not by the shortest
  1386. route. It will not know the secret passages and tunnels of the Razides and
  1387. other jailers who seem to move throughout Inferno with ease, for it is
  1388. unlikely you have ever been there before. Likewise it will not know any of
  1389. the mysteries of the Dark Citadels, unless you were very unfortunate or
  1390. very lucky in a previous death.
  1391.  
  1392. The personality of the psychopomp depends upon the form it assumes, but it
  1393. is also tainted by your experiences. It will relate to you depending on how
  1394. you relate to yourself. For example, if you are one of those poor souls
  1395. full of self loathing and suicidal tendencies, you psychopomp will bear you
  1396. quite a grudge. It will treat you the same way you treat yourself. Of
  1397. course this can also be a great advantage if you treat yourself well. But
  1398. the psychopomp must also deal with the memories of untold ages of suffering
  1399. and torture, and this cannot help but color its world view. It has known
  1400. little happiness in its existence, for it only remembers the sorrows of
  1401. Inferno. This can make it either very melancholy or very jaded, and
  1402. possibly even resentful towards you. Thus, even the best of psychopomps is
  1403. a gloomy companion, and the worst can drive a sane man to the verge of
  1404. clinical depression.
  1405.  
  1406.  
  1407. Other Guides
  1408.  
  1409. Of course there are other beings who can act as psychopomp if you are
  1410. unable to summon your own. As I noted above, creatures born to Inferno
  1411. innately know how to travel through the horrors of hell unscathed, and so
  1412. they make the best guides. Unfortunately, they are also the hardest to
  1413. acquire. After all, most Infernals are accustomed to enslaving humans, not
  1414. serving as their guides. I know I am beginning to sound like a broken
  1415. record, but here as in all things, life is easier with a conjurer around.
  1416. Summoning and binding infernal creatures is stock and trade for death
  1417. conjurers, and can be used as psychopomps. The dangers here are obvious,
  1418. for the bound servant will invariably do its best to lead its master
  1419. astray. All the normal caveats for dealing with summoned creatures apply to
  1420. summoned psychopomps, with the extra warning that they are even more
  1421. dangerous on their home territory.
  1422.  
  1423. Non-conjuring Harrowers may also wish to avail themselves of an Infernal
  1424. psychopomp, an undertaking nearly guaranteed to be more trouble than it is
  1425. worth. To find a guide without magical aid requires one to actually
  1426. physically subdue the would be psychopomp. I do not think it is necessary
  1427. to go into all of possible dangers with this course of actions.
  1428. Remember, that such beings will invariably lie, cheat, and mislead you if
  1429. you do not have some way of ensuring their loyalty. I have no idea ho one
  1430. might do this, for there is little you can hold over their heads. It may be
  1431. possible to strike some sort of bargain, or perhaps trade souls for
  1432. information, but remember, Infernals never have your best interests at
  1433. heart.
  1434.  
  1435. There are said to be certain magical artifacts that provide their user with
  1436. control over a psychopomp. Finding one of these objects is no mean feat,
  1437. but could be invaluable for a non-magician making the journey into Inferno.
  1438. Most of these artifacts carry a price with them, and usually not a
  1439. financial one, so careful research before use is strongly advised. Some
  1440. artifacts require a sacrifice of some sort, while others will take what
  1441. they want. For example, I have read in several places of a small jade
  1442. carving of an old Chinese man. The statuette is purported to summon up a
  1443. psychopomp in the form of a wizened sage who will guide one through Inferno
  1444. wherever you wish to go. The unfortunate side effect of this is that the
  1445. old man causes the user to age one year for every twenty-four hours spent
  1446. in Inferno. If it's important enough the price may be worth it, but then
  1447. again it may not.
  1448.  
  1449.  
  1450. The Comfort of Strangers
  1451.  
  1452. One option remains for those in search of a psychopomp. The option is an
  1453. obvious one, but seldom used because the risks are so unpredictable. What
  1454. is more common in Inferno than the lost souls of those who have died? The
  1455. Souls of the dead would seem to be the best guides available. After all,
  1456. they certainly have no reason to support their Infernal lords, and every
  1457. reason to be sympathetic to those of us from the outside. The first problem
  1458. with this course of action is finding someone who is free from the clutches
  1459. of the Razides and their torture chambers. These are rare but not
  1460. impossible to find, for no prison is escape proof.
  1461.  
  1462. But you can never trust a dead man. Dead souls are notoriously unreliable.
  1463. They have suffered untold pain and suffering at the hands of their
  1464. tormentors, and their minds are almost certainly unhinged. At least with an
  1465. enslaved Infernal psychopomp you can be sure that it is trying to lie to
  1466. you. With a human soul you can never be sure as to what is going on.
  1467. Sometimes a man's pain and hate become so overwhelming that he wants only
  1468. to take his vengeance on those around him, whoever they are. Then their are
  1469. those poor misguided souls who voluntarily work for Astaroth's Legions,
  1470. betraying their own kind for a false hope of future glory. These will lead
  1471. you astray as surely as any devil or demon. Even if the soul means well, it
  1472. may not know very much at all. After all, Inferno is as alien to these lost
  1473. souls as it would be to you or me.
  1474.  
  1475. This book is more than anything a group of warnings about Inferno, and
  1476. though it may seem to some that I am continually looking at the dark side
  1477. of things, that I am an eternal pessimist, well, remember what we are
  1478. discussing here. So in that spirit, I present another warning about human
  1479. souls as psychopomps, and all other psychopomps for that matter. The
  1480. Infernal Lords are cunning, insidious beings who take great joy in
  1481. discomfiting humans at every turn. It is not uncommon for one of these
  1482. demonic powers to assume the form of a hapless human soul just to lead a
  1483. Harrower down the path to perdition. It is realistically impossible to tell
  1484. such a doppelganger from a true lost soul, so beware traveler! You can
  1485. never know for sure.
  1486.  
  1487.  
  1488. The Well Equipped Harrower
  1489.  
  1490. Traveling into Inferno should never be undertaken lightly or without
  1491. exhaustive preparation on behalf of the Harrower. I have already discussed
  1492. how to find entrance into Inferno and some suggestions on finding a guide
  1493. through the underworld. It remains to give a few pointers about what to
  1494. bring with you into the fiery depths. First of all bring a conjurer. All
  1495. tight, I have gone on about that enough and so I will leave it there.
  1496. Second, bring weapons. Now weapons come in many different forms, and I urge
  1497. the well prepared individual to bring them all. In this day and age we have
  1498. firearms available to us, and they are certainly very effective as far as
  1499. they go. Likewise high explosives can have a devastating effect on even the
  1500. most horrifying of Infernal beasts.
  1501.  
  1502. As nice as modern weapons are, having a simpler backup is absolutely
  1503. necessary. You see, the laws of physics as experienced in Elysium do not
  1504. always hold true in Inferno. This is particularly true of the Dark Citadels
  1505. of the Death Angels, where the very form of reality is an expression of the
  1506. individual dark lord's wants and desires. If he wishes it, a Death Angel
  1507. may simply assert that gunpowder does not ignite in his domain. If you were
  1508. counting on your shotgun alone to see you through, a sad surprise awaits
  1509. you. A handy sword, knife, or club can be invaluable in such circumstances.
  1510.  
  1511. Other equipment should be obvious. Food and water are vital. Legend has it
  1512. that any who eat food from the underworld can never leave, and sometimes
  1513. this is the case. Assume that nothing below is edible or potable. Even that
  1514. which is not poisonous at face value can have a lasting effect on the soul.
  1515. There are many Infernals who use the lure of food and drink to manipulate
  1516. unwary souls and Harrowers alike. It is entirely possible that by accepting
  1517. an offer of food, you are also agreeing to a bargain whereby you turn over
  1518. custody of your soul. So, ample provisions are a must for any serious
  1519. Infernal explorer.
  1520.  
  1521. Several reliable sources of light can also prove invaluable. As we shall
  1522. see in the next chapter, there are no days or nights in Inferno, but there
  1523. are certainly dark place aplenty. Again, as with modern firearms it is best
  1524. to have a primitive backup for any modern devices one brings along.
  1525. Batteries have a curious habit of malfunctioning at the most inconvenient
  1526. times. Those with a classically inspired imagination may think it odd that
  1527. I would advise a Harrower to bring flint and steel for making fire, but
  1528. flame is something that never goes out of style in the underworld, and you
  1529. may need that torch.
  1530.  
  1531. What does one wear to Hell? It is a question with no easy answer. Weather
  1532. in Inferno is mercurial at best, and always inconvenient. As we shall see,
  1533. every conceivable form of precipitation exists in the underworld, and quite
  1534. a few that one would never imagine. So, unfortunately my recommendation is
  1535. to be ready for anything. It will be freezing cold. It will be hot enough
  1536. to cook you alive in your clothes. It will rain, and snow, and there will
  1537. be mud, marshes, and planes where you will walk neck deep in excrement.
  1538. Which brings me to one final fashion recommendation: a gas mask, air
  1539. filter, or at the very least nose plugs can prove absolutely invaluable.
  1540. The smells, stenches, and stinks that assault one can easily overwhelm even
  1541. the strongest among us.
  1542.  
  1543. Death and Time
  1544.  
  1545. Now is as good a place as any to comment on the issue of time in Inferno
  1546. versus time in Elysium. There is no set relationship between the two. Three
  1547. days can pass for a Harrower in Inferno, while for the rest of us in
  1548. Elysium only an hour passes. Likewise the reverse could just as easily
  1549. happen. In fact, time is not absolute within Inferno either, so that
  1550. Razides might inflict a thousand days of torture on some poor soul, while
  1551. elsewhere Golab seems to enjoy a single day of twisted reveling. It seems
  1552. likely that while time in Elysium is much closer to absolute, Inferno can
  1553. ignore these rules to a degree. But only to a degree. For time certainly
  1554. does matter in Inferno. We have seen how the flow of events in our world
  1555. and Metropolis effects Inferno, so there must be a relationship of some
  1556. sort.
  1557.  
  1558. It is most probable that in Inferno time truly is all relative. More
  1559. specifically, the experience of time is all relative. How time seems to
  1560. pass for you has no relation to how it passes for others in Inferno or for
  1561. the rest of the Universe. This does not obviate the possibility of an
  1562. absolute time, it just means that in Inferno experiences may differ. What
  1563. determines how you experience time is a matter of where you are and what
  1564. you are doing. Obviously in the torture chambers, time is compressed, so
  1565. that hours of suffering are packed into minutes. How you experience time
  1566. can easily change from one step to the next, but of course you will never
  1567. be aware of any shift. For you, time seems to flow along normally. It is
  1568. only upon returning to Elysium that you find that while you were gone your
  1569. children have grown up and your wife has left you.
  1570.  
  1571. Conjurers skilled in the lore of Time and Space will probably be able to
  1572. sense these time shifts and may even be able to do something about them.
  1573. There are even some Conjurers specializing in the Realm of Transcendence
  1574. who make a special study of the flow of time in Inferno. They more than
  1575. anyone may be able to determine for themselves the flow of time for
  1576. themselves in Inferno. However, even their skills can not stand up to the
  1577. reality shifting powers of a Death Angel or Astaroth on its own territory.
  1578. Likewise, any meddling on behalf of the conjurer with the flow of time may
  1579. well alert the Infernals to the conjurer's presence, creating new problems
  1580. for the meddling Harrower.
  1581.  
  1582. In Conclusion
  1583.  
  1584. There is much more to know, but I could not possibly present it all to you
  1585. here. There are probably gates I do not know of, and ways for portals to
  1586. form that I have never dreamed possible. Anything can happen when Inferno
  1587. and Elysium collide, especially in these modern days of chaos in the wake
  1588. of the Demiurge's disappearance. Look for your own ways, for the road less
  1589. traveled often has fewer guardians to stand in your way.
  1590.  
  1591.  
  1592. Part Two
  1593.  
  1594. An Infernal Gazetteer
  1595.  
  1596. Chapter 4:
  1597.  
  1598. Infernal Geography
  1599.  
  1600. The study of Infernal Geography is a difficult subject, and defies any easy
  1601. description or categorization. The form of Inferno changes in constant
  1602. flux, with few things remaining as they are for any length of time. For our
  1603. purposes we can only speak of tendencies gleaned from past experience.
  1604. Since the landscape is so turbulent, I have relied on the accounts of many
  1605. different men and women over history to compile this section. I myself have
  1606. seen but a meager fraction of Inferno's hellish offerings, but I can assure
  1607. you that I have chosen only the most reliable sources for my exerts here.
  1608. As often as possible each there are many other examples to corroborate the
  1609. information I have given here. I focus here on only the most common, and
  1610. therefore likely to be found features of Inferno. However, I have also
  1611. included some of the more interesting, but less known features that were
  1612. simply too fascinating to leave out.
  1613.  
  1614. I have organized this section somewhat haphazardly, as many of the
  1615. geographical features of Inferno defy description under the aegis of a
  1616. single category. Nevertheless, I have made some generalizations, and have
  1617. tried to stay as close to them as possible without distorting my
  1618. information. So we will begin with a general overview of Inferno's
  1619. geography, much as any travel guide would comment on the climate and
  1620. landscape of a country. From there I have divided the chapter into two
  1621. sections: The Circles and The Wild Zones. I have further subdivided each
  1622. of these sections as you will see. I have left information concerning the
  1623. Dark Citadels from this section, deciding that it was more appropriate to
  1624. discuss these edifices along with their Lords, something I do later in the
  1625. book.
  1626.  
  1627.  
  1628. Inferno: The Big Picture
  1629.  
  1630. Inferno defies easy description in most ways, and certainly no accurate map
  1631. can exist. Inferno is a land without bounds, extending as far as the
  1632. Universe itself. A small door inside a small building can open onto a
  1633. seemingly endless lake of fire. Bottomless pits, continent wide desserts,
  1634. and seas of blood and pile can all be found in Inferno, and seldom in the
  1635. exact same place twice. Likewise the weather can vary almost
  1636. instantaneously, from pounding rain to piles of flaming feces falling from
  1637. the skies. Anything is possible, and most everything is likely to happen at
  1638. one time or another.
  1639.  
  1640.  
  1641. The Great Circles of Hell
  1642.  
  1643. The Great Circles of Hell is by far the most famous region in Inferno, at
  1644. least to the western reader. Those in China and the east might be
  1645. intimately familiar with regions like The Earth Prison and the Yellow
  1646. Springs, areas of Inferno just as famous in their own right. But here I
  1647. focus on the Great Circles, because it is here that Astaroth chose to place
  1648. his great fastness, as well as the citadels of his ten lieutenants. If
  1649. Inferno can be said to have a geographic center, then the Circles are it.
  1650. However, the extent of the Circles, like all of Inferno is limitless.
  1651. Contained within each ring of hell there is an infinity of space, with
  1652. torture chambers, lakes of fire, and the hatching chambers of demons
  1653. stretching off into infinity. Each ring is a world unto itself, a world of
  1654. pain and suffering devoted to breaking the human spirit.
  1655.  
  1656. If one were to somehow journey far enough above the Circles of Hell, or The
  1657. Pit as it is sometimes known, one might begin to be able to contemplate the
  1658. enormity of the place. It is a huge funnel descending down into the depths
  1659. below. All scale is lost when viewing the Pit from above, it is just too
  1660. huge to contemplate easily. The diameter of the highest circle is certainly
  1661. over a thousand miles, with each descending circle somewhat smaller, until
  1662. one reaches the lowest pit at the base of the funnel. This seemingly
  1663. bottomless well measures a hundred miles across, and at the center of it
  1664. stands the Dark Citadel of Astaroth himself, the guiding hand behind all of
  1665. Inferno's horrors. The Citadel shoots up into the sky from the center of
  1666. The Pit, its spire rising to the level of the highest circle.
  1667.  
  1668. Beyond the diameter of the circle extends a barren plain of dust, bereft of
  1669. any features. One could wander this plain for lifetimes on end and never
  1670. reach anywhere. For others, a few steps will take you into The Wild Zones.
  1671. It all depends on which path you take, and whether or not you know how to
  1672. navigate within the confines of Inferno's twisted physics. This plain,
  1673. often called the Dead Lands, is a form of private hell, and each individual
  1674. is effectively alone when he walks it. There is no chance of meeting
  1675. another person place or thing, unless you know how to look for them.
  1676. Likewise, if you are traveling in a group and should never lose sight of
  1677. your companions, you may well never find them again. Here, as with most of
  1678. Inferno, a psychopomp of some sort is inordinately valuable.
  1679.  
  1680. Standing on the edge of the Circles it is physically possible to see the
  1681. other side of The Pit, even though it is a thousand miles away. Unlike the
  1682. surface of our Illusory Earth, Inferno is not a sphere and there is no
  1683. horizon to block our vision. Assuming your sight is acute enough, you can
  1684. see forever. Of course, standing on the edge of The Pit is one of the very
  1685. few places in Inferno where it is actually possible to see for a long
  1686. distance unobstructed. Certainly once one is in the confines of the Circles
  1687. themselves, there are many, many more sights that demand ones attention.
  1688.  
  1689. Looking down into The Pit, one notices that there are several rivers that
  1690. work their way through the circles. In some cases they form rings and are
  1691. actually circles unto themselves, while in other places they cut down
  1692. through the circles, often forming tremendous waterfalls that cascade down
  1693. for miles. Not all of these rivers flow with water, indeed there is
  1694. probably a river of each and every foul substance known to man somewhere in
  1695. The Circles. The most dangerous however are those that do seem to flow with
  1696. water, for these are the rivers that actually scour the soul to its core,
  1697. not just pollute and tear at the flesh that surrounds us.
  1698.  
  1699. The rivers seem to be the only feature that actually cuts across the
  1700. boundaries of the Circles. In all other ways they are clearly delineated
  1701. from each other. The circles are for the most part terraced, so that there
  1702. is a long vertical drop between one Circle and another, usually of some
  1703. tens or more miles in height. In a few areas some circles slope into each
  1704. other, forming a single unbroken surface, but this is rare, for the
  1705. denizens of each Circle are extremely jealous of one another. There are
  1706. stairways, ladders, and even long, curving ramps that connect one Circle
  1707. with another, and likewise there are underground Labyrinths that connect
  1708. the various levels. there are often wars fought between different parts of
  1709. The Pit, with one Circle fighting for the souls imprisoned in another. In
  1710. these cases all manner of ingenious siege equipment for scaling the levels
  1711. are employed by the denizens of the Pit.
  1712.  
  1713. From the top of the Pit it is of course only possible to see the surface of
  1714. each level, where only the barest hint of the tortures that lie below is
  1715. visible. Nevertheless, each Circle holds a bewildering array of
  1716. topographical features on it surface. Looking down one can see raging
  1717. blizzards ravaging areas immediately adjacent to sweltering desserts. Foul
  1718. looming forests, forsaken plains, twisted cities, and roiling oceans can
  1719. all be found within the Circles, and each Circle is a world unto itself. It
  1720. is a common misconception that as one goes deeper into the Pit, the Circles
  1721. become smaller. This is false on two counts. Most obvious is the fact that
  1722. the circles themselves get wider as their circumference grows smaller,
  1723. giving each Circle approximately equal surface area. This seems to have
  1724. been an entirely aesthetic move on the part of Astaroth, since space within
  1725. each Circle is effectively infinite. As with all things Infernal, our false
  1726. reality concepts of physics have no place here.
  1727.  
  1728. It is below ground that the true horrors of The Circles are most often
  1729. found. Truth be told, Infernals prefer to do their business out from under
  1730. the open sky, even if it is the sunless, red canopy of Inferno. A vast
  1731. network of underground tunnels, rooms and caves riddle every level of The
  1732. Pit, containing the vast majority of Inferno's torture chambers. There are
  1733. whole city's in the underground, places where Infernal beings live out
  1734. their miserable, damned lives without ever leaving the dark bosom of their
  1735. Circle. Also down below there are chambers that are in fact whole world
  1736. unto themselves. One never knows what lies beyond that door of black iron.
  1737. It could be a tiny dank closet full of rotting flesh, or it could be a vast
  1738. red jungle, crawling with strange and fearsome creatures of pure
  1739. malevolence.
  1740.  
  1741. Piercing down from the First level to the very bottom of The Pit are the
  1742. Dark Citadels of the Death Angels. I will discuss the individual citadels
  1743. later, when I deal with the Death Angels themselves, but there are a few
  1744. general characteristics that are true of all ten citadels. Each Citadel
  1745. extends the whole depth of The Pit, and there are entrances to the Citadels
  1746. in each Circle. Like the Circles themselves, the space within the Citadels
  1747. is effectively unlimited, and unconstrained by our notions of time and
  1748. space. The Citadels appear to be evenly spaced around the circumference of
  1749. The Pit, but once one is down in the Circles, it seems as if they almost
  1750. intertwine among each other. The Citadels focus the torture and malevolence
  1751. of the pit, serving as ten great magnets for suffering. Since Citadels
  1752. burst through the levels, they also transcend all the petty rivalries and
  1753. feuds that typify the rest of The Pit's denizens.
  1754.  
  1755. A Citadel is really the will and desires of its master made solid in stone
  1756. and iron. As such, the Death Angels have complete control over every aspect
  1757. of their Citadel, and are aware of everything that transpires within their
  1758. domain. Never be fooled into thinking that you have somehow managed to
  1759. sneak into a Citadel unobserved while its Lord is present, for this is an
  1760. impossibility. However, since the disappearance of the Demiurge, and the
  1761. withdrawal of Astaroth into Elysium, several of the Death Angels have
  1762. abandoned their Citadels, preferring to make their fortunes in our world.
  1763. Now the other residents of The Pit have begun to take over parts of the
  1764. Citadels, with minor Razides setting themselves up as Lords of Hell. This
  1765. has done nothing but bring more chaos to the already turbulent world of the
  1766. Circles.
  1767.  
  1768. In the center of all this chaos sits the vast, bottomless pit surrounding
  1769. Astaroth's Citadel, a place of harsh winds and frequent electrical storms.
  1770. Long, black steel suspension bridges link the Citadel with the lowest
  1771. Circle, supported by black, iron chains as thick as ten men. The bridges
  1772. begin at the lowest Gates of the Citadels of the Death Angels and stretch
  1773. across the miles of empty space to the Ten Gates of Astaroth's Citadel,
  1774. each of which bears the name of a different Death Angel. In times past each
  1775. Death Angel was the only one who had the right to use their Gate, but since
  1776. Astaroth has withdrawn his Citadel is sealed to all who come calling, even
  1777. his "trusted lieutenants".
  1778.  
  1779. Astaroth's towering palace is said to contain the greatest horrors of The
  1780. Pit and all of Inferno. Astaroth, the master devisor of human torments once
  1781. took great pleasure in personally dealing with some of the more interesting
  1782. humans who came into his realm. Now however the torture chamber stands
  1783. empty, the rusting iron halls ring with the howling wind. I have heard of
  1784. no one who has journeyed into the Citadel, or even discovered a point of
  1785. ingress. It towers above the circles, a hollow, metal spire. I shall
  1786. discuss the Citadel somewhat more in the context of my chapter on Astaroth
  1787. himself, but I believe you get a feeling for what I'm getting at.
  1788.  
  1789. In Dante's poetry we find the Circles divided according to sin, but in the
  1790. true Inferno, sin is almost irrelevant. The minions of hell care not a bit
  1791. for why you ended up in The Pit, they are simply happy to have you there.
  1792. The tormenting of humans is what Astaroth created them for, and they know
  1793. no other joy. But the human spirit can be quite resilient, and it takes a
  1794. long time to strip it of all the marks it accrues during a full lifetime.
  1795. Even as we are strapped to the rack, we hold on to the precious memories of
  1796. better days and happier times. This is of course exactly what the torturers
  1797. want, to dredge up every memory so that they might rip it from our souls.
  1798. To this end, the Circles are divided not by sin, but by torture.
  1799.  
  1800. Each of the Nine Circles represents a different class of torture. Once
  1801. perhaps this delineation was pristine, but over the centuries of our
  1802. imprisonment the lines have blurred. The Circles have taken on many aspects
  1803. of independent kingdoms, and so they have stolen torture techniques
  1804. formerly reserved for other levels of The Pit. Nevertheless, each Circle
  1805. tends to keep pretty close to its original calling, chiefly because this is
  1806. the area at which the Circle's denizens excel. After all, it is only
  1807. natural to enjoy those things which one does well.
  1808.  
  1809. In an ideal Hell, the condemned soul would begin in the First Circle and
  1810. work his or her way down through the levels. At Each level you would lose
  1811. some of your memories and feelings. for the less hardy souls one or two
  1812. levels might be all it takes and then you are ready to move on. Of course
  1813. just because you were ready does not mean that your tormentors are ready to
  1814. let you go, and most times a soul was made to travel the whole gauntlet
  1815. anyway, out of spite. Today it is not uncommon for a soul to get caught on
  1816. one level forever. In these days of declining numbers of new souls coming
  1817. to Inferno, everyone is greedy to hold on to what they have got, for once
  1818. their are no more souls to torture, these poor beings lose their reason for
  1819. living.
  1820.  
  1821. Passage between levels is traditionally accomplished via the rivers that
  1822. run down the depth of The Pit. These rivers are of course tortures in their
  1823. own right, and I shall deal with each of the major ones in its own right
  1824. shortly. Some of the rivers have guides, non-partisan demons who exist
  1825. merely to ferry the souls from one level to another, taking whatever glee
  1826. than can from the short while they have the dead human at their mercy.
  1827. Sometimes, in the case of a waterfall, the soul is simply pitched over the
  1828. side and made to suffer the pain and anguish of the long fall. After impact
  1829. on the lower level, they are immediately fished out by their new
  1830. tormentors, and a new round of torture can begin.
  1831.  
  1832. There are of course other ways to move from one level to another. Roads,
  1833. stairways, and ramps connect the levels, but these are usually reserved for
  1834. the use of Infernal beings only. Any human soul caught out in the open on
  1835. one of these byways is sure to draw the attention of all kinds of nasty
  1836. demons and Razides, intent on doing the hapless traveler no good. Since the
  1837. age of Pit Wars began (see below) many of the local warlords have blocked
  1838. or destroyed the passages in order to protect their territory. In these
  1839. places the roads have become no-man's land, a war zone full of fences,
  1840. barbed wire, and manned by demonic guards.
  1841.  
  1842. Finally, there are the tunnels within the Circles themselves. As I
  1843. mentioned, the vast majority of each Circle is underground. It is here that
  1844. The Labyrinth connects in with Inferno and Metropolis, and it is here that
  1845. passage between Circles is most easily accomplished. Of course underground,
  1846. one never knows for sure where one stands, and the lines between the
  1847. Circles can be blurry at best. In areas where Demon Lords from different
  1848. Circles are fighting, many of the tunnels connecting the Circles are likely
  1849. to be blocked or guarded. Nevertheless, there is always a way that is not
  1850. guarded, for the Circles themselves are infinite in space when necessary,
  1851. and one can always find a portion unknown to even the most ancient Razide.
  1852.  
  1853.  
  1854. The Pit Wars
  1855.  
  1856. When Astaroth left Inferno for our world, he threw all of Inferno into
  1857. tumult. Without his guiding hand to keep the demons and torturers in line,
  1858. the natural destructiveness of his subjects evolved into rebellion. The
  1859. Death Angels were among the first to turn against their Lord, and some of
  1860. them fell before his wrath. But the rebellion has spread down through all
  1861. the Circles of The Pit, and in some places, Astaroth's will is openly
  1862. opposed. Some remain loyal, either to the Dark Lord himself or to one of
  1863. the Death Angels, but others have set up their own Kingdoms of the Damned,
  1864. and now covet the power that Astaroth and his lieutenants have wielded for
  1865. so long.
  1866.  
  1867. Of course, times being what they are, and demons being what they are, they
  1868. spend most of their time fighting among themselves and posing no real
  1869. threat to Astaroth or the Death Angels. These are the pettiest of a race of
  1870. beings that is innately puerile. They are so jealous of each other, that
  1871. they cannot hope to ever work together, nor can any one of them hope to
  1872. have the power to subjugate its fellows. So they fight endless, pointless
  1873. wars with each other, with human souls the booty for which they battle.
  1874. Souls have little intrinsic value of course, but the love of torturing
  1875. humanity is so ingrained in the fabric of their being that these
  1876. contemptible demon lords care for nothing else in the world. The envy
  1877. Astaroth and the Death Angels because they had their choice of souls to
  1878. torture. they cannot imagine a world beyond Inferno, and have no ambitions
  1879. that extend beyond what they know.
  1880.  
  1881. The Wars themselves can be astoundingly violent. It is hard, if not
  1882. impossible to destroy a demon or Razide while it reside in Inferno. The
  1883. most one can hope for is to inconvenience it for a while until its body
  1884. reforms. As such, it is not enough to deliver a killing blow in combat.
  1885. One's enemies must be hacked to bits, torn limb from limb, incinerated into
  1886. ash. Even then the enemy will rise in a few hours or days. So there can
  1887. never be any sure victors in battle, and your enemy will always rise to
  1888. face you again another day. It seldom occurs to the demons to try and take
  1889. prisoners. Prisons and torture chambers are for humans. Demons are immune
  1890. to such unpleasant circumstances, for they take joy in pain and suffering,
  1891. whatever the cause and whoever the victim.
  1892.  
  1893. Of course not all of the Circles have succumbed to war. In many places in
  1894. The Pit, the cycle of torture goes on as it has for centuries, with human
  1895. souls starting at the top and working their way down through the levels.
  1896. Today though, there are fewer and fewer souls coming into Inferno and the
  1897. system is beginning to break down. As they say, idle hands are the Devil's
  1898. playground, and when the torturers and demons have no victims, they become
  1899. restless. In many places they have begun to take their time with the humans
  1900. they are lucky enough to get their hands on. Should the whole process shut
  1901. down, the restless Infernals would no doubt try to make their way into our
  1902. world, searching for the prey they so desperately crave.
  1903.  
  1904.  
  1905. Chapter Five:
  1906.  
  1907. The Circles
  1908.  
  1909. But enough of this teasing you with hints and tidbits about what horrors
  1910. await in The Pit. I now turn to a group of narratives taken from those who
  1911. have actually suffered through the varied tortures of the Circles, and
  1912. managed to still relate the tale to me or put it down on paper. Of course,
  1913. these narratives report only some of the horrid experiences one might
  1914. experience down below, but they give a good feel for the characteristics
  1915. of each Circle. No complete catalog is possible of course, so one could
  1916. hope for little more than I have presented here.
  1917.  
  1918.  
  1919. The First Circle
  1920.  
  1921. Tales of the First Circle are, naturally enough, easier to come by than the
  1922. stories of The Pit's lower reaches. After all, almost everyone makes it at
  1923. least as far as the First Circle, and many continue on from that point. The
  1924. First Circle specializes in tortures of stultification: endless tasks, mind
  1925. numbing physical labor, sensory depravation, Chinese water tortures and so
  1926. on. I present here a rather picturesque tale told to me by one Arthur
  1927. Baker, and American businessman who died of cirrhosis of the liver at the
  1928. ripe old age of 59. I actually summoned Baker up quite by accident one
  1929. night, but since I had gone to all the trouble of binding him, I decided to
  1930. take down his story for the record. He was quite helpful, mistakenly
  1931. believing I had saved him from his torment, and I trust his version of
  1932. events will prove illustrative. I leave out from this manuscript the long
  1933. series of expletives that followed when I informed Arthur that I was
  1934. through with him and sending him back from whence he came.
  1935.  
  1936. Arthur's Tale
  1937.  
  1938. "I died the same way most of my friends will probably die: my body crapped
  1939. out on me. Nobody to blame but me I guess. I'm the guy that kept on
  1940. drinking after everyone said I should stop, but I still had six years to go
  1941. before retirement, and sometimes you need a drink to help get you through
  1942. the day. Sales is a rough business, and scotch will sometimes take the edge
  1943. right off it. It's not a new story I guess. Like I said, I wouldn't be
  1944. surprised to see everyone I knew in the company end up the same way. It's
  1945. just how you make it through the day. So, three months in the hospital,
  1946. waiting for a transplant that never comes, and BAM! it's over. For me it
  1947. was easy, I just didn't wake up. No pain, no last words, no nothing, just
  1948. fade to black.
  1949.  
  1950. I'd never been much for religion, not since I was a kid. Sure I went in on
  1951. Easter and Christmas, but that's about it. But I went to Sunday school, I
  1952. knew the routine. You sin, you go to hell. Right, sure, whatever, I'm too
  1953. busy to worry about that shit. I had work to do, women to meet, you know.
  1954. So you can imagine just how damned surprise I was to wake up after dying. I
  1955. mean, I knew I had died. I literally felt my soul leave the body, and I
  1956. remember waking up and looking down and saying, "Hey!, That's me dead!"
  1957. Pretty brilliant huh? Nobody ever accused me of missing the obvious.
  1958.  
  1959. So anyway, there I float, and then it's sort of like I get caught in some
  1960. kind of current, because I start moving. I can't control where I'm going,
  1961. but I'm moving faster and faster, passing right through the floor of the
  1962. hospital. I'm falling right through the God damned planet! All the while
  1963. I'm having all these weird thoughts, remembering stuff I haven't thought of
  1964. years, stuff I couldn't have even tried to remember, like my fourth
  1965. birthday party, or my first football game. Crazy stuff, it's all coming
  1966. back to me. I'm so busy having all these amazing memories that I kind of
  1967. lost track of where I was and where I was going and then all of a sudden
  1968. it's dark.
  1969.  
  1970. I feel like I'm back in my body again. I can feel that I'm lying on the
  1971. ground, I can move my legs and arms. It's cold, like cement or something.
  1972. My first thought is that I've been having some weird dream and rolled out
  1973. of my hospital bed and hit the floor. I try to move but I can't get up. I
  1974. bang my head on something metal only a few inches above my head. Then I
  1975. realize I'm in some kind if metal box. I start to scream. I screamed my God
  1976. damned head off. I screamed about being buried alive and about running out
  1977. of air, and all kinds of shit. I must have screamed for hours. I have no
  1978. idea how long, because it was dark, and I was lying there in nothing but my
  1979. hospital gown, squirming and banging. Finally I gave up.
  1980.  
  1981. I just lay there. I don't know how long, but it was a long, long time.
  1982. There was nothing. Just the sound of my own breathing. I didn't run out of
  1983. air, It wasn't too hot, too cold, I was just there. I waited and waited and
  1984. waited. And then I think I went crazy. I'm not sure, but t seems like I
  1985. must have. I never slept, I never ate anything. Never even pissed. I just
  1986. lay there thinking. I still had all these wonderful lost memories, but soon
  1987. I had gone over each part of my life a hundred times in my head. That's all
  1988. I had to keep me company, memories of my life, and eventually I got sick of
  1989. them. Who cares? It's all over now. Now you're stuck in some God Damned
  1990. Box, and you ain't going anywhere.
  1991.  
  1992. Finally they let me out. They told me I had been in there for five years. I
  1993. don't know it's not like they're real big on telling the truth, and who can
  1994. say how time passes down there. I mean, it certainly could have been five
  1995. years, it seemed that long. The box opened and light streamed in and I was
  1996. so happy I could scream for joy. That lasted all of about one second, for
  1997. that's hen I saw them for the first time. The God damned Devil was standing
  1998. there, offering me a hand up out of the box. He wasn't red with hooves and
  1999. a tail, but I knew right away it was a devil or some such shit. He was man
  2000. sized, but with grey skin, like a corpse's. He had black eyes - no pupil or
  2001. whites or color, just solid black, and a pug nose kind of like a pig. He
  2002. stood there naked except for some sort of weird metal vest. Then he smiled,
  2003. and he had razors for teeth. That's when I started screaming again. Then I
  2004. realized that the metal vest was actually part of him, or sewed on to him
  2005. or something. And it's got all sorts of little nozzles and vents on it that
  2006. shot out all kinds of disgusting liquids and gasses. Then I just puked. I
  2007. hadn't eaten in years, but I just puked. That's one thing I've learned
  2008. about this place, you can always puke. They love it when you just throw
  2009. your guts up.
  2010.  
  2011. The devil thing grabbed me by my hair and pulled me off down a dark, metal
  2012. corridor. We passed rows and rows of boxes just like the one I had been in,
  2013. and I thought, "Those poor bastards, they don't know how good they've got
  2014. it in there." And that's how it began. From there I was taken through a
  2015. maze of corridors, and never saw another soul. Or devil either for that
  2016. matter. Just me and my caretaker, smiling that razor sharp smile of his. I
  2017. was dumped into a room. It seemed he just picked one at random, but who can
  2018. tell with these guys?
  2019.  
  2020. Inside was the weirdest looking typewriter I have ever seen. It must have
  2021. had a few thousand keys on it, but no letters. Each key was a word instead
  2022. of a letter. It was one of those old fashioned typewriters with the spokes
  2023. or whatever they're called. No IBM electrics in hell. So Razor Mouth sits
  2024. me down in this uncomfortable, metal chair, my bare ass freezing because of
  2025. the metal, and he tells me to start typing. The God Damned thing start's
  2026. giving me dictation while I'm no front of this eight foot long type writer.
  2027. He just stare at me like, "What the hell?" and then he leans over and
  2028. bites my cheek with those damn teeth. I scream, because it hurts like a
  2029. bitch. He starts giving dictation again, and I start looking for the words
  2030. on the type writer. Well, you can imagine it took me a while to find the
  2031. words he was spewing out, particularly as most of em weren't English.
  2032. Every time I took too long he'd bite me, or scratch me, or kick me.
  2033.  
  2034. And on it went. I finally got the hang of it, and I typed and typed, never
  2035. quite fast enough for him, but at least he wasn't hurting me all the time.
  2036. I tell, you, I've never typed so much in my life. Nobody has. I'd sit
  2037. there and type for hours, and days, and probably months and years. No rest,
  2038. no pauses, no coffee breaks. Anytime I slowed down he'd take a bite out of
  2039. me. The bites healed pretty quick, but that only meant he could hurt me
  2040. again in the same place a little later. There seemed to be a never ending
  2041. supply of paper, and I just typed away. It took everything I had to keep up
  2042. with him. I couldn't think of anything but what he was saying and which key
  2043. had that word on it. Sometimes the keys would change while I wasn't
  2044. looking. Words I had finally learned to count on being in a certain place
  2045. were all of a sudden somewhere else. Then mad panic to find the word, Razor
  2046. Mouth gnawing away at me the whole God damned time.
  2047.  
  2048. You know the worst thing though? The typing was shitty, the biting and
  2049. scratching sucked, and whatever the hell he was dictating didn't make any
  2050. sense, but the worst God damned thing was that every time I finished a page
  2051. he would just pick it up, ball it up, and pop it in his mouth. I mean what
  2052. the hell was I typing for if he was just gonna eat the god damned paper? Of
  2053. course I guess that was the point. I was typing because I hated to do it. I
  2054. was typing in a blind panic that lasted forever. Eventually he grew tired
  2055. of the dictation routine, but I must have typed a million pages for the
  2056. bastard. I'm not kidding, at least a million. It went on and on forever. Is
  2057. still think about it. Every time Razor Mouth or one of his pals talks to
  2058. me I'm looking for the keys...
  2059.  
  2060. Of course that was just the beginning for me. The typing was I guess a
  2061. sweet reminder of my days in the sales office, dictating to Laura. From
  2062. there it just got worse. Mindless, endless, shitty jobs. I've worked in
  2063. assembly plants that made nonsense machines, working for hours. I've broken
  2064. rocks that move and try to bite you, weeded fields of plants that grow back
  2065. unless you eat them as soon as you dig them up. I've done every menial,
  2066. minimum wage hell job you can think of, all the while Razor Mouth and his
  2067. buddies are watching over me. There is no rest, no coffee breaks. It just
  2068. keeps on coming. I mean hell, if you hadn't pulled me out of there, I'd be
  2069. doing some other God damned job right now, or I'd still be on my hands and
  2070. knees counting red hot pebbles for Razor Mouth. I really can't thank you
  2071. enough guy..."
  2072.  
  2073.  
  2074. And that's where Arthur's tale ends. You can see from his story that the
  2075. First Circle is a land of mindless tasks, suitable for breaking any spirit.
  2076. The theory behind the tortures seems to be that, as long as you are
  2077. working, you won't have time to think about anything else. Arthur's time in
  2078. the box is typical, although there are quite a few different sensory
  2079. deprivation tortures used in the First Circle. It is not uncommon for some
  2080. souls to be sent from one to another for years, decades, or even centuries.
  2081. It all depends on the whims of the Razides and their servants. For some
  2082. humans this is enough to break down the memories completely. They become so
  2083. obsessed with doing their work and avoiding the lash that they think of
  2084. nothing else, driving out their memories and replacing them with the
  2085. details of sorting screws or breaking rocks. These however, are rare souls,
  2086. those weak minded individuals who barely have the right to claim their
  2087. divine human origins. Most are made of sterner stuff, and will descend to
  2088. the next Circle, there to meet more terrors and tortures.
  2089.  
  2090.  
  2091. The Second Circle
  2092.  
  2093. The Second Circle of The Pit is one of the more geographically diverse
  2094. regions of Inferno. While most of the Circles can do their business in dank
  2095. tunnels, and underground expanses, the Second Circle uses the mutable
  2096. physics and geography of Hell to it's fullest advantage. For the Razides
  2097. and demon lords of this part of the Pit treat their guests to horrendous
  2098. conditions, both "natural" and "man made." I have chosen a rather typical
  2099. story to represent the Second Circle, someone who was actually an
  2100. acquaintance of mine in life. Rene Foucault was a Swiss art dealer around
  2101. the turn of the century. A nice enough fellow, he was at heart a hustler
  2102. and confidence man, selling forgeries as readily as the real thing. I came
  2103. across him in the Second Circle during my third and final trip to Inferno
  2104. in 1987. I would have thought Rene would have given in sooner, but he
  2105. seemed to be holding up well. I only had a few moments to speak with him
  2106. before his torturers recovered from my attack, but I was careful to record
  2107. the entire conversation. I present it here, slightly edited, but with all
  2108. the relevant information intact.
  2109.  
  2110. Rene's story
  2111.  
  2112. "The first moment I realized I was going to be leaving the mind numbing
  2113. labor of the First Circle I felt joy for the first time since I died. My
  2114. tormentor saw this and laughed. She told me that she was sorry to see me
  2115. go, and assured me that I would miss the pleasures of the First Circle when
  2116. I realized what Hell had in store for me. With that she lifted my into the
  2117. air and hurled my flailing body over the edge of the First Circle. I fell
  2118. with ever increasing speed for miles, racing down towards the Second
  2119. Circle. I had a few moments to contemplate my rapidly approaching
  2120. destination, and as quite stunned by the sight. The whole of The Pit lay
  2121. stretched out before me, the Dark Citadel of Satan himself towering up from
  2122. its center. Below me was the Second Circle, a patchwork quilt of deserts,
  2123. jungles, seas, and mountains. I myself, much to my chagrin, seemed to be
  2124. heading straight for one of the higher peaks. With a resounding thud my
  2125. body nearly disintegrated from the force of the fall, the incredible pain
  2126. causing me to black out.
  2127.  
  2128. I came to somewhere on the side of the mountain, my body made whole once
  2129. again by the Infernal curse that keeps our damned souls from ever truly
  2130. dying. For the first time since I came to Inferno I was free of a
  2131. tormentor. There was no foul temptress shadowing my every step, forcing me
  2132. to work at endless tasks. I was free to go where I pleased, or so I
  2133. thought. The top of the mountain was quite cold and I had no clothing, so I
  2134. decided to try and make my way down the mountain. Although logically part
  2135. of my brain realized that I was in no danger of death, the fear of pain is
  2136. so deeply ingrained that I sought more comfortable climes.
  2137.  
  2138. The descent was horrendous. I am no climber, and soon enough I fell. I lay
  2139. there broken for days or months or years, waiting for some kind demon to
  2140. come along and bring me off to new tortures. The cold cut me to the bone,
  2141. and slowly the life seeped out of me. I never was able to sleep or lose
  2142. consciousness, and lay there stewing in my own pain for what seemed like
  2143. eternity. Finally I blacked out, my body could take no more, and again I
  2144. woke to a fresh corpus, ready to begin the descent again. I fell twenty
  2145. more time before I reached the base of the mountain. Seemingly solid
  2146. handholds would give way without explanation. Landslides, gale force winds,
  2147. hail, snow, rain, and any other conceivable climatic impediment.
  2148.  
  2149. This mountain had become my own private hell, with just myself and the
  2150. elements. It was only later that I discerned the nature of The Second
  2151. Circle. Here the demons are in the very rocks on which you stand and the
  2152. air you breath. The land itself is against you here. I finally made it the
  2153. base of the mountain, only to find that my journey had just begun, for the
  2154. mountain now stood within a vast, trackless desert, something that oddly
  2155. enough had not been visible during my fall. Then it had seemed the mountain
  2156. was but one of many. and so I began the journey across the vast desert. For
  2157. years I wandered, dying every so often of thirst, heat exhaustion, or any
  2158. number of other natural perils. The sands were incomprehensibly
  2159. treacherous, always shifting, and sometimes hiding deep pits, a form of
  2160. quicksand, or other dangers.
  2161.  
  2162. I suffered through countless deaths as I voyaged on, never seeing another
  2163. living being. Finally, after succumbing to one of the land's many pitfalls
  2164. I awoke to find myself in tunnels reminiscent of the First Circle. It was
  2165. here that I found myself in the Second Circle's great Labyrinth. Wandering
  2166. at random through the dark recesses and sinister chambers I was subjected
  2167. to every conceivable physical punishment. Sometimes I would fall through
  2168. the floor only to find myself in a pit of fire, my flesh slowly burning
  2169. away as I tried to claw my way out. You cannot imagine the horror of trying
  2170. to make one's way out of such a place. Every few feet is an eternity of
  2171. agony as your flesh melts away, only to be reborn an instant later. I died
  2172. countless times in the fiery hell, taking what must have been several years
  2173. and thousands of lives to make it from one end of the room to another.
  2174.  
  2175. Of course this was only the beginning. My tormentors have exposed me
  2176. innumerable times to the many and varied elemental tortures. I spent quite
  2177. sometime swimming up through a seemingly endless sea, my lungs bursting
  2178. until there was no more air, and then drowning as my body filled with sea
  2179. water, only to wake up a few moments later and start all over again. All
  2180. the while the terrible water pressure was squeezing the life out of me.
  2181. Buried alive in a glacial ice flow I spent ages clawing my way to the
  2182. surface. One might imagine that so many deaths would become monotonous,
  2183. that one would grow accustomed to it. I assure you this is not so. Every
  2184. death is as painful as the last, every dying moment is full of terror.
  2185.  
  2186. And then there are the less natural terrors I was made to endure,
  2187. conditions that never existed in nature. I have been forced to wade for
  2188. weeks, months and even years through miles and miles of human feces, my
  2189. lungs bursting from the smell, bile spewing from my stomach in a seemingly
  2190. endless stream of filth. I have been buffeted along steel corridors to the
  2191. constant beating of a deafening bell, the very sound vibrations being
  2192. enough to slowly turn your brain and bones to mush. I have marched across
  2193. fields of electricity, the power coursing through my veins like lightening.
  2194. Endless travel, constant pain. These are the hallmarks of the Second
  2195. Circle. There is no rest, no respite.
  2196.  
  2197. The worst part of it all is that you are so constantly alone. There is no
  2198. focus for the hate that wells up in you. No demons to blame it all on. Of
  2199. course the demons were all around me, I see that now, thanks to you Shelby.
  2200. I took comfort, what little comfort I could, in the memories of my former
  2201. life. I thought on the happier times, but eventually even they faded into
  2202. distant memory, mere shadows in the back of my head. Shelby, you are the
  2203. first person I have seen in what must be eons. Thank you my friend, you
  2204. have given me respite from this interminable Hell, at least for a moment. I
  2205. will cherish the memory of this moment, and of the good times we have had
  2206. together all those years ago. I know you would help me if you could, but
  2207. you have explained that it is impossible. Maybe the strength you have given
  2208. me today will be enough to see me through this horror, give me the strength
  2209. to hold off death just a moment longer."
  2210.  
  2211.  
  2212. I feel rather bad about this last bit. You see, I found Renee because I
  2213. needed to ask him a question. In order to get to him I had to temporarily
  2214. disrupt the demons who were tormenting him, allowing us time to talk. the
  2215. demons, as Renee said are all around you in the Second Circle. They are the
  2216. very landscape on which you walk, the fire that burns your flesh. They
  2217. tailor every experience to your discomfort. I'm afraid that by talking to
  2218. Renee I undid much of the work Inferno had done him. He was on the verge of
  2219. forgetting his most recent human life, and I'm sure he would have soon lost
  2220. all but the bare essence of his soul. He never was much of an outdoorsman.
  2221. But by drudging up old memories, I forced Renee into further years of
  2222. torment, quite unintentionally of course. Such are the risks when dealing
  2223. with matters Infernal.
  2224.  
  2225.  
  2226. The Third Circle
  2227.  
  2228. I come now of the Third Circle, an area I find very interesting because it
  2229. takes such a different approach to torture than most of Inferno. While pain
  2230. and suffering are the basic ingredients of any Infernal experience, that
  2231. suffering does not always have to come from without. Sometimes we can cause
  2232. ourselves even greater agony simply with our minds. Given a little help
  2233. from an Infernal denizen, we can do wonders to ourselves. Whatever do I
  2234. mean? Well, I give you here the story of one Alissa Jacobs, a popular
  2235. author and historian who died in the early 1970's. A stalwart woman, she
  2236. made it through the first two Circles with relative ease, but encountered
  2237. in Circle Three a whole new challenge to both her soul and her ego. I came
  2238. across her story in the notes of a fellow Conjurer, a respected man who's
  2239. words I take to be true. Certainly the tale accurately portrays very well
  2240. the mind games that go on in the Third Circle, and I have since verified
  2241. that Ms. Jacobs' soul did make its way to Inferno upon her death. This is
  2242. only an excerpt from a larger manuscript which includes details of the
  2243. first five Circles.
  2244.  
  2245. Alissa's Story
  2246.  
  2247. "It was with a tremendous sense of relief that I found myself free from the
  2248. endless elemental tortures of the Second Circle. Moving from one to the
  2249. other seemed to happen almost by accident, and at the time I counted myself
  2250. lucky. Truth be told, nothing here happens by accident, and I now know it
  2251. was simply that my time had come. I fell into a river, one of the many that
  2252. cuts across the levels of this place, and was swept along in it's warm,
  2253. brackish water. The swift current carried me along at a tremendous pace,
  2254. bouncing me off rocks and overhanging tree limbs. My trip ended rather
  2255. suddenly as I was hurtles over the side of a waterfall the size of several
  2256. Sears Towers. Caught in the foamy spray I have no idea how far I fell, and
  2257. was aware of the piercing rocks below only for a moment.
  2258.  
  2259. I awoke lying at the side of the river, my body aching and caked with mud,
  2260. but otherwise fine. From down below the waterfall looked positively tiny,
  2261. no more than forty feet in height. I knew this to be one of hell's little
  2262. tricks, but it was certainly disorienting. The river was now little more
  2263. than a stream, calmly flowing away from the small pool at the base of the
  2264. waterfall. I seemed to be in some sort of walled garden or maybe a house
  2265. without a roof. Certainly there were fifteen foot stone walls all around
  2266. me, forming a rectangular chamber with the waterfall at one end and the
  2267. stream flowing under the wall at the other. Looking around, I found that
  2268. someone had laid clothes out for me, a rather pleasantly patterned sun
  2269. dress and sandals. It had been ages since I had had clothes, not since they
  2270. were flayed from me by my demons in the First Circle. Wary, I picked up the
  2271. clothing and examined it. Finding no discernible threats, I put them on.
  2272. Very comfortable. Now I was becoming quite nervous about what was going on
  2273. here.
  2274.  
  2275. There was a door in the wall on the other side of the stream. I had not
  2276. noticed it before, but now that I had put on the dress, it was plain as
  2277. day. A nice, normal sized wood door. I waded across the shallow stream and
  2278. then opened the door. beyond I found the walls continued, forming a
  2279. corridor which stretched off for some distance, side corridors branching
  2280. off every so often. I began to investigate. The ground was finely raked
  2281. dirt, with some stones and pebbles and I could clearly see the footprints I
  2282. left as I walked forward. I picked up a stone and used it to mark the wall
  2283. as well. As I suspected I was in some sort of maze. I figured that my only
  2284. real option was to try and find my way out, and so that is what I set about
  2285. doing. I had read somewhere that if you always followed the left hand wall
  2286. you would eventually find your way out. So, mark my path along the wall
  2287. with the stone, I set off on this new journey.
  2288.  
  2289. For the first time I was aware of the passage of time in the maze. The sun
  2290. rose and set over me, and night fell. Even the moon waxed and waned over
  2291. the long months and years I spent in the maze, searching for an exit. It
  2292. was soon obvious that, not only was the maze huge, but that it also did not
  2293. obey any normal laws of building or geometry. I literally wandered for a
  2294. month and a half before I ever saw the same part of the maze twice. Even
  2295. then I could not be sure, except for the markings I had made. Later I found
  2296. that someone was changing those markings or adding their own. Trying to
  2297. follow my own footprints also proved pointless, as they to would change. I
  2298. found evidence that I had walked round and round in an ever smaller circle,
  2299. or walked up the sides of walls, or any number of other strange signs that
  2300. could not trust anything here.
  2301.  
  2302. Increasingly my frustration grew and grew. I knew there had to be a trick
  2303. to the place. If I could just figure it out I would escape. I tried
  2304. climbing walls but could never quite manage it. Although I was thirsty and
  2305. hungry it was never a real impediment. I should have died of dehydration in
  2306. a few days, but years after my last drink of water (an involuntary one
  2307. while in the river) I lived on, searching for a way out. I tried
  2308. everything, even killing myself in hopes that it would end the terrible
  2309. nightmare, but of course that just meant a moment's blackout and then right
  2310. back where you left off. All the while I had this obsession with the idea
  2311. that everything would be fine, as long as I could make my way out, figure
  2312. this place out.
  2313.  
  2314. And then my time was up. After something close to three years, I suddenly
  2315. heard another voice for the first time. 'Time's up!' it boomed, 'You fail!'
  2316. And in a flash I was out of the maze, my whole body wracked with pain. The
  2317. pain seemed to go on and on for hours. It ended and I was in another room,
  2318. with another puzzle to solve. I had always been fond of chess, more for the
  2319. aesthetics of the game than the strategy, and here I found myself faced with
  2320. a large, very strange chess board. It sat on a long wooden table, with two
  2321. comfortable looking chairs seated opposite each other. The board itself was
  2322. rectangular, and over ten feet long, and three feet wide. The checkered
  2323. surface was covered with black and red squares, each on inch to a side,
  2324. making the long side have 120 squares. Two rows of simple, marble chess
  2325. pieces filled up each of the long sides of the table, a mishmash of all the
  2326. normal pieces plus many I did not recognize, each side (black and red)
  2327. totaling 240 pieces. I sat down in the seat on the black side. I rested a
  2328. moment, examining the board, and when I tried to stand up I found I
  2329. couldn't. I simply could not stand.
  2330.  
  2331. Frantically looking around, trying to find some clue to my imprisonment I
  2332. did not notice the appearance of my opponent. I looked up and screamed with
  2333. surprise when I saw her sitting opposite of me. A pretty, older woman,
  2334. dressed in a flowing burgundy dress. She said nothing, simply leaned
  2335. forward and moved what looked to be a pawn forward three spaces. I had no
  2336. idea what was going on, and continued to struggle to get out of my chair. A
  2337. tried talking to her, but she simply smiled and waited. This went on for
  2338. quite a while. I found that I could move the chair itself up and down the
  2339. length of the table, but that was all. I could not turn the chair, or move
  2340. myself from the chair. Finally I settled down to the inevitable and began
  2341. to play, moving one of my seventy pawns forward two squares. I at least was
  2342. going to obey the rules.
  2343.  
  2344. Over the next few days of play I realized that this was not the chess I
  2345. knew. Of course, that was obvious from the beginning, but now as the game
  2346. progressed, the differences became more and more marked. She seemed to move
  2347. her pieces according to some rule book I had never read. At first I thought
  2348. she was moving them at random, but when I tried to do the same I found it
  2349. impossible to place the piece down in any but a few, legal squares. More
  2350. confusing still, how a piece could move seemed to depend both on what the
  2351. piece was and where on the board it was. Thus I was never sure where I
  2352. could and could not move, making strategy a difficult process. Later on,
  2353. after a few months of that first game, I came to realize that the movement
  2354. rules also varied depending on what turn of the game it was. Most strange
  2355. of all was the taking of pieces, or rather the fact that we could not take
  2356. pieces. She never took any of mine, and I was never allowed to take any of
  2357. hers. It seemed it was a game of position rather than capture.
  2358.  
  2359. The game proceeded apace for quite a while, and every time I thought I was
  2360. figuring it out, every time I thought I was getting ahead, I found that I
  2361. was wrong, everything had changed. I had gotten nowhere. Still I had that
  2362. same feeling that as soon as I solved the riddle of the game I would be
  2363. free. I became totally engrossed in it, thinking of nothing else, trying to
  2364. hold in my mind all the rules I had managed to figure out. I would spend
  2365. hours or days figuring out my next move, sure that it would bring me
  2366. victory. Of course I had no idea how one won the game. No idea at all. My
  2367. opponent seemed to play with ease, never waiting or thinking, always
  2368. smiling and courteous. I grew to hate her. I would sometimes, in my
  2369. frustration, rail against her for hours, cursing her in every way I could
  2370. imagine. I even tried to throw pieces at her, only to find that they would
  2371. not leave my hand unless I was placing them on the board. In protests I
  2372. would stop playing, do nothing for days on end. She would just sit there,
  2373. waiting. Eventually I would give in, because of course I had been thinking
  2374. of nothing but the game the whole time anyway. I'd make a move.
  2375.  
  2376. Food and drink mattered not at all. My backside didn't get sore from all
  2377. the sitting, there was no physical discomfort. The only torture was the
  2378. game itself, and my efforts to wrap my mind around it, to try and figure it
  2379. out. I knew there was a solution, an answer to it all. But of course my
  2380. jailers would never have let me find it, even if there really was an
  2381. answer. They could not afford to let me have the joy of that single victory
  2382. over them. But I did not think of this, did not realize that it was all a
  2383. trick. The game became everything, and when, after years of that one game
  2384. it all finally came to an end, I actually missed it. I still think of it,
  2385. of how I might have won, even as new puzzles and mental tortures occupied
  2386. my time.
  2387.  
  2388. From the chess game I went on to scores of others during my time in the
  2389. Third Circle. All of the situation I found myself in were designed to
  2390. confuse and frustrate, to overload the brain. Sometimes they were small,
  2391. sit down puzzles like the chess, and other times they were the large scale
  2392. tortures like the maze. there was never any solution, or if there was I was
  2393. never allowed to find it. Always I would be informed that time was up, my
  2394. purgation would continue because I hadn't been smart enough. On and on it
  2395. went, seemingly forever. My mind barely remembered a time before the
  2396. puzzles, and then all it thought of was the pain and horror of the time
  2397. before, something better left forgotten. As for my life on Earth, that was
  2398. all but gone completely. Even my own name was fading from my skull."
  2399.  
  2400.  
  2401. Poor Alissa never did make it out of Inferno and into a new body. She
  2402. proved so resilient after the first few Circles, that she was drafted into
  2403. the Legion's of the Damned where she serves to this day. In reading
  2404. Alissa's tale, I just wanted to remind the reader that time in Inferno is a
  2405. totally subjective experience. Just because years passed for Alissa, does
  2406. not mean that years passed in our time line. In fact, as our time goes, she
  2407. was only in Inferno for seventeen of our months before she was mustered for
  2408. Astaroth's army. not that she did not experience thirty-seven years of pain
  2409. and suffering. She did, and hated every moment.
  2410.  
  2411.  
  2412. The Fourth Circle
  2413.  
  2414. The Fourth Circle is everything one might think of when asked to picture
  2415. Hell. Here is where torture is practiced the old fashioned way: scalpels,
  2416. racks, hot pokers, drills, bladed sex toys, and so forth. In the Fourth
  2417. Circle the Razides reign supreme, and they involve themselves intimately
  2418. with every one of their guests. They are masters at degrading the human
  2419. form and causing it pain. They hold off death for ages, inflicting
  2420. unbelievable agony until the last possible instant. Then, when the body
  2421. finally expires, the nature of Inferno simply recreates it afresh, ready
  2422. for another round of torture. The Fourth Circle is undoubtedly one of the
  2423. most efficient of The Pit's torment zones, and only the rare individual
  2424. needs anything more to scour their souls of all memory. For this reason
  2425. alone many of the lower Circles resent the Fourth, feeling that they do not
  2426. get their fair share of victims. The result is that the Fourth Circle hosts
  2427. the largest number of Pit Wars in the entire Nine Circles. Every other
  2428. Circle, but particularly the lower ones will send bands of demons up The
  2429. Pit to snatch the Fourth's souls.
  2430.  
  2431. The Fourth Circle also houses some of the most rambunctious and therefore
  2432. rebellious of Astaroth's minions, and there are great many independent
  2433. warlords in the Fourth these days. This of course simply leads to more Pit
  2434. Wars, with individual demon lords fighting their brethren in the Fourth
  2435. Circle. All this chaos means that, unlike most parts of Inferno, there is
  2436. actually sometimes a chance for a lucky human to escape the clutches of his
  2437. or her tormentors. How long one can remain free in such a place is open to
  2438. debate, but any amount of respite in Hell is worth the effort.
  2439.  
  2440. It is seldom worth talking to someone who has recently been in the clutches
  2441. of the Fourth Circle's master torturers. For this reason I decided to
  2442. present you with the transcript of an exchange I had with a Razide I
  2443. summoned from the Fourth Circle. I naturally enough had other tasks in mind
  2444. for the Infernal when I summoned it, but I took the opportunity to record
  2445. some of its thoughts about what existence in its home realm is like for
  2446. humans. I realize that one should never trust the words of a demon, but in
  2447. this instance I feel we can depend upon its version of things rather more
  2448. than usual. Razides love to gloat, and that is exactly what I gave him a
  2449. chance to do. Here follows a transcript taken from a tape I made of the
  2450. conversation. We pick up after I have finished the rituals of binding and
  2451. so forth.
  2452.  
  2453. TYREE: Well, well, well, Aburshanuphyl, how are we this evening?
  2454.  
  2455. ABURSHANUPHYL: I was fine till you called me here...
  2456.  
  2457. T: Yes, I'm sure you were. Listen, before we get down to the task at hand I
  2458. thought we might talk a bit.
  2459.  
  2460. A: Interesting thought, I've never heard of warlocks engaging in idle chit
  2461. chat, but you seem to be in charge for the moment so we'll play it your way.
  2462.  
  2463. T: I didn't think you would have any objections.
  2464.  
  2465. A: So what are we to discuss wizardling?
  2466.  
  2467. T: I rather thought it would be nice to talk about your home. The Fourth
  2468. Circle of The Great Pit of Inferno if I'm not mistaken?
  2469.  
  2470. A: You are not mistaken. What exactly is it you'd like to know about my
  2471. wondrous home? Getting ready for your inevitable fate my friend?
  2472.  
  2473. T: Oh, yes, I'm quite interested in that inevitable fate of which you speak
  2474. so blithely. In fact, that's what I'd like to hear about. Tell me of the
  2475. fate of human souls in your home.
  2476.  
  2477. A: As you wish dread sorcerer. <laughter> Where shall I begin?
  2478.  
  2479. T: Why not with what happens to a soul once it slips on down from level three?
  2480.  
  2481. A: <spits> Pheww! The Third Circle indeed. That place is a travesty. I
  2482. honestly don't know what happened to my Third Circle brethren to make them
  2483. so soft. Mind games and parlor tricks is all they know. They simply don't
  2484. get results. Is it any wonder that we clear four times as many humans as
  2485. they do? Once they've given up, the soul comes down to us, either by river,
  2486. by being thrown over the edge, or through The Labyrinth. Once the snotling
  2487. is in our grasp, it's first come first serve. Whoever gets there first can
  2488. play with it as long as he can hold onto it. That's the only problem
  2489. really. All my fellow Fourthers are always trying to take from me what's
  2490. mine. No respect for property down there.
  2491.  
  2492. T: I'm sure you would never indulge in such practices.
  2493.  
  2494. A: Of course not! I'm a respectable demon, not one of those low brow sorts.
  2495.  
  2496. T: Exactly why I chose you my friend...
  2497.  
  2498. A: I cannot thank you too much for that human! If you had not yanked my
  2499. from my home, I would be having my way with a young lad of fifteen even as
  2500. we speak. Killed his own parents and then himself. Playing with matches.
  2501. Deserves everything he gets. No doubt some other bloodthirsty Infernal has
  2502. snatched him away while I'm here having this lovely chat.
  2503.  
  2504. T: Now, now, let's not be bitter. What's done is done.
  2505.  
  2506. A: Easy for you to say! But I digress. You wanted to know about what
  2507. happens to the snotlings once we get a hold on em. Well, the possibilities
  2508. are endless, as you might imagine. I've tormented and tortured human souls
  2509. for well over four thousand years and you learn a lot in that amount of
  2510. time. The important thing in my line of work is to keep yourself fresh, to
  2511. keep your edge. It's not that torture ever gets boring. It's what I live
  2512. for after all, and even the simplest act of causing pain fills my little
  2513. heart with joy. But variety is the spice of life and so on, and I like to
  2514. try new things all the time.
  2515.  
  2516. T: What kind of new things?
  2517.  
  2518. A: Well, technology is a wonderful thing, and it's done wonders to the
  2519. torture business. I man, the technology has always been there, in
  2520. Metropolis anyway, but in Inferno we have been behind the times. Human
  2521. inventions like batteries, power saws, electric drills, radiation, and so
  2522. on all have wonderful applications when turned to the task of hurting human
  2523. flesh. I for one have been in the forefront of incorporating such devices
  2524. into my techniques. Others chose to keep with more tried and true methods:
  2525. the scalpel, the hot poker, the lash. I'm not putting such methods down.
  2526. Quite the contrary, they are marvelously effective...
  2527.  
  2528. T: Well that's really fascinating. I had no idea how advanced things had
  2529. become down there. However, since we don't have all night to discuss such
  2530. matters, why don't we focus in on some specifics. Maybe some of your
  2531. favorite torture methods?
  2532.  
  2533. A: Certainly human, I'd be happy to accommodate you. I wouldn't want to
  2534. waste your time, after all I'm sure my boy is long gone by now.
  2535.  
  2536. T: Yes, what about him? How did you deal with your pyromaniacal charge?
  2537.  
  2538. A: Ah yes, young Alex. A very resilient lad. Few humans of his tender age
  2539. manage to make it past the First Circle, much less all the way down here to
  2540. my realm. I came across him right after he was flushed out of The Labyrinth
  2541. up on the Third. He was a little shaken up, but glad to be past whatever
  2542. mindless attempt at confusion they had addled him with up there. I'm of the
  2543. old school, and don't much care for messing about. I pounced on the lad,
  2544. claws and fangs barred. After years of the calm, insufferable boredom of my
  2545. upper level brethren, he was more than a little shocked. Having severed the
  2546. tendons in his arms and legs, I dragged the mournful boy, screaming and
  2547. wailing, all the way back to my lair.
  2548.  
  2549. T: Your lair? Explain that.
  2550.  
  2551. A: Lair? Oh yes. You see, every demon has its own territory down in The
  2552. Pit. We are all masters of our own small part of Inferno, and in that area
  2553. whatever we say goes. We can shape it into whatever form is necessary to
  2554. accomplish our goals. I have but to think of it, and any torture device
  2555. imaginable comes to my hand. Of course, we own such places only as long as
  2556. we hold on to them. some stronger Infernal might well come along and try to
  2557. take what is mine. Worse yet, one might offend one of the Death Angels or
  2558. even Astaroth himself. Cross any of them and your license to torture gets
  2559. revoked on the spot. You'll end up doing some horrible task in a Dark
  2560. Citadel worse than anything you ever inflicted on a human.
  2561.  
  2562. T: Back to Alex...
  2563.  
  2564. A: Of course, of course. I know you are in a bit of a rush. Things to do
  2565. and all that. I like to start things off in a traditional torture chamber
  2566. setting. Dingy stone walls, dirt floor, braziers with hot coals, racks,
  2567. iron maidens, manacles, shackles, whips, knives, and so forth. The sight
  2568. alone is enough to send most into hysterics. I know some of my friends like
  2569. to start out with sexual tortures, removing every shed of dignity to soul
  2570. might have held onto up to this point. While I don't doubt the efficacy of
  2571. such techniques, I prefer to hold off on them, build up to them if you
  2572. will. It's Hell after all, everyone expects the knives, barbed wire, and
  2573. strange contraptions. I like to start them off with what they know, being
  2574. careful to inform them that the worst is yet to come. That always gets
  2575. them, because they think "What could be worse?" and they scare themselves
  2576. all the more trying to figure out what's coming next.
  2577.  
  2578. So with Alex, I began by strapping him down to the central work table I
  2579. keep nice and cold for just such occasions. The cold metal usually jerks
  2580. them right out of whatever fear induced stupor my mere presence has put
  2581. them in. I started with the scalpel, beginning with the fingers. Slowly,
  2582. delicately I began to flay the flesh of his pinkie, moving on to the rest
  2583. of the fingers and then the whole hand. It takes an iron grip to hold on to
  2584. someone and keep them from squirming and ruining your cut. Sometimes I
  2585. actually use a vise to hold them in place. The real joy of this process is
  2586. listening to them beg for mercy, offering to tell you whatever you want.
  2587. They'll confess to anything at this point. That's how I found out about
  2588. Alex's little escapade with matches. He told the whole story, begging for
  2589. forgiveness. You'd have thought they would have learned after three
  2590. previous Circles that there is no forgiveness.
  2591.  
  2592. The biggest problem is when they pass out. I have just the machine for such
  2593. occasions however, and I like to wheel it over and let them watch me hook
  2594. it up. It's a tremendous black box with all manner of dials and gauges on
  2595. it, with a thick black tube ending in a long needle coming out of one side.
  2596. Most of it's just for show, just to make them wonder. The needle is the
  2597. important part. I stick that somewhere real uncomfortable, usually the
  2598. genitals, but sometimes the anus or even the ear or nose. It pumps them
  2599. full of stimulants that keep them from passing out. Of course I could do
  2600. this in a much less invasive way, but what would be the point?
  2601.  
  2602. Working on the boy with the scalpel took me a good thirty hours of careful
  2603. cutting, but in the end I had him totally flayed and castrated. He was
  2604. conscious the whole time, thanks to my machine. He had long ago lost the
  2605. strength to cry out, but the look in his eyes as I held up the mirror was
  2606. as rewarding as an scream (no eyelids, so he couldn't help but look). Then
  2607. I set to work on the internal organs, taking them out piece by bloody
  2608. piece. My machine kept him alive through it all. Sometimes, just for shock
  2609. value, I'd pop a piece in my mouth and give it a good long chew. Maybe I'd
  2610. swallow, maybe spit it back out on his face.
  2611.  
  2612. That's me just getting started. Finally, after a few weeks of this I let
  2613. him die, but only so I can start on his fresh, newly rejuvenated body. With
  2614. Alex I followed my usual routine and started the whole process over just
  2615. like before. The inevitability of it really gets to them. They know exactly
  2616. what's coming and how horrible it is, and there's nothing they can do about
  2617. it. The boy started screaming again, which was fine with me, and I started
  2618. in on his fingers again. I went on like that probably five hundred times.
  2619. For me time is nothing, it comes and goes as I please in my lair. I like to
  2620. take my time, and draw things out as much as possible.
  2621.  
  2622. But even a good flaying can get boring after a while, and so I moved on to
  2623. something a little more personal to my charge's sins. Not that I care a bit
  2624. for sins or any other such moral concerns, but I've found that a little
  2625. personalized touch goes a long way in these matters. So for Alex it was
  2626. fire, and old favorite of mine. I began with the pain of hot metal searing
  2627. flesh and moved on to small fires. At first I worked just in the medium of
  2628. heat, burning, scorching, and baking part or all of him for extended
  2629. periods. What's particularly nice is how easily infected burn wounds get,
  2630. producing just gobs of pus. Every human I've ever met absolutely hates pus,
  2631. especially when you pour it down their throats. Soon enough I added cold to
  2632. my fire, going back and forth between the two, working with the blade to
  2633. gain access to their internal organs and so forth.
  2634.  
  2635. And then you came along.
  2636.  
  2637. T: Oh, well, terribly sorry about that, and just when it was getting
  2638. interesting. Just for the record, what was your next step?
  2639.  
  2640. A: Hmmmmm. Well, I was probably going to go ahead and break out the big
  2641. toys. The machines. I start with the rack, the pressing boards, and the
  2642. maiden and go from there. I have some wondrous contraptions in my lair.
  2643. Chambers that sprout all kinds of invasive implements at seemingly random
  2644. times. Electric shock, noxious gasses, acids, bases, poisons, meat
  2645. tenderizers. Anything you can imagine...
  2646.  
  2647. T: Yes, I'm sure it's quite an amazing sight to behold. No doubt about it.
  2648. And how do you know when your time is up, when it's time to send your
  2649. charge on down below.
  2650.  
  2651. A: You would bring that up wouldn't you?
  2652.  
  2653. T: Yes I would. Now tell me, why do you let them go?
  2654.  
  2655. A: All right, since you asked so nicely. There comes a point when you know
  2656. that the pain has done all it can. If they're still holding on at that
  2657. point, then you have to let them go. Not everyone does of course, but
  2658. that's a recipe for trouble. You've got to know when to let go, to move on.
  2659. For me that's not usually a problem. I'm experienced enough, and good
  2660. enough to scour the soul clean and have it ready for Metropolis and
  2661. rebirth. Sure, sometimes I have to let one go on down, but that's not a
  2662. problem for me.
  2663.  
  2664. T: No, of course not. Well, if we could get on with the night's business...
  2665.  
  2666. A: Certainly.
  2667.  
  2668.  
  2669. As you can see, Aburshanuphyl had quite a lot to say on the subject. The
  2670. Fourth Circle merits no more of our attention at this point. It is, to me,
  2671. one of the less interesting aspects of The Pit, if only because it is
  2672. exactly what one might expect. So, without further adieu, we move on to the
  2673. half-way mark: Circle Five.
  2674.  
  2675.  
  2676. The Fifth Circle
  2677.  
  2678. The Fifth Circle is in almost every way the opposite of the Fourth. There
  2679. is no physical torture here, in that it resembles the Third. But rather
  2680. than meddling with the damned soul's mind, the demons of the Fifth level
  2681. tug at human heart strings. Emotions are the stuff of this circle. Here
  2682. they bring out the worst in men and women, taking to torturous extremes
  2683. such laudable feelings as love, honor, hate, anger, arousal, and joy. They
  2684. turn that essential part of the human condition, our feelings, into a
  2685. agonizing liability that we wish we could rip from our souls. Eventually
  2686. this is exactly what happens.
  2687.  
  2688. For my tale of emotional woe, I have decided upon an interesting diary I
  2689. found in a Parisian used bookstore one rainy afternoon. Curiously, the
  2690. diary was of a German woman, Marlene Braun, but she seems to have been
  2691. living in France and was keeping her diary in French in order to improve
  2692. her language skills. The diary records Marlene's dreams over a period of
  2693. four months, almost all of which had to do with Inferno. It is obvious
  2694. that, in her case, the Infernals had done a less than adequate job in
  2695. erasing her memories, because her subconscious still had very vivid
  2696. remembrances of the horrors she encountered in the afterlife. Her dreams
  2697. concerning the Fifth Circle (she dreamed of all nine) are among the best
  2698. accounts of that realm I have ever read or heard. Such accounts are usually
  2699. quite muddled and confused, as is the nature of things when emotions come
  2700. into play.
  2701.  
  2702. Marlene's Story
  2703.  
  2704. "Last night I dreamt of The Place again, as I do every night. Fear of my
  2705. dreams kept me up until early morning, and I would not have slept at all
  2706. had I not had such an eventful afternoon. I hate sleep. I've tried the
  2707. sleeping medicine the Doctor prescribed. It does no good for me. I even
  2708. tried the absinthe that Gerard gave me, but that only made matters worse.
  2709.  
  2710. Last night it was again the place of bad feelings about which I dreamt. I
  2711. had just arrived there from the place where they torture me with knives and
  2712. whips and... I found myself in a pretty garden full of flowers and
  2713. butterflies. There was a man there, I call him Father, even though he is
  2714. not my Father. We sit and talk pleasantly for a while and I am so happy.
  2715. But then I say the wrong thing. I say that I am happy and Father grows very
  2716. quiet. He becomes angry with me and starts to yell and carry on. He tells
  2717. me how bad I am. How selfish. He goes on and on and I know that he is
  2718. right. My happiness is wrong. It is misplaced. I should not feel such
  2719. things, because I have no right to be happy. Not after what I have done to
  2720. Father and Mother.
  2721.  
  2722. Another man comes into the Garden, which is now a sad place for me. He is
  2723. my lover. I know this about him, although I can not remember his name. We
  2724. embrace and he grows angry at me because I am sad. He says I have no right
  2725. to be sad, that he has come all this way to see me and I should treat him
  2726. with the love and respect he deserves. He does not want to spend his time
  2727. wiping up my tears. He wants us to make love and be happy. He kisses me and
  2728. I feel guilty because Father is watching. Father is right, I should not be
  2729. happy, but my lover is right as well, I should be joyful in his presence. I
  2730. am torn and do not know what to feel. My Father grows angry with the man,
  2731. and says that he has besmirched my honor. I protests, but Father only yells
  2732. at me, calling me a common whore.
  2733.  
  2734. My Happy Man challenges Father to a duel, and the two of them fight. I am
  2735. frightened and sad and try to stop them. They push me away, both of them,
  2736. and I fall to the ground. They fight and kill each other. I am sad, very
  2737. sad, and I start to cry. But then I am happy because the two men were mean
  2738. to me and deserved to die. Such cruel thoughts make me uncomfortable
  2739. though. I do not know what to think, so I leave the Garden, almost crying,
  2740. but almost laughing. I am exhausted by my feelings, and want nothing more
  2741. than to go to sleep.
  2742.  
  2743. I cannot sleep though, for as I leave the Garden I am caught up in some
  2744. strange sort of street festival. People all around me are celebrating, but
  2745. there is no joy in the air. They are full of lust and pride. They are all
  2746. so beautiful that they think of only themselves, and their own beauty. But
  2747. I know that I am more beautiful than any of them, and I look down on them
  2748. in scorn. I move among them, admiring my own beauty in the many windows
  2749. that line the street. Men and women approach me, wanting to dance with me.
  2750. I am so pretty and desirable that I need only take the most attractive of
  2751. them. I pick those who I like best and let them walk beside me. Everyone
  2752. wants to be with me because of my beauty, something that makes me very
  2753. proud.
  2754.  
  2755. Soon such a crowd has gathered around me that they sweep me off my feet. An
  2756. army of beautiful men and women, all of whom what to be close to my
  2757. superior beauty. I am so happy that they love me for my good looks. They
  2758. sweep me into a large room, the floor of which is covered with a supple
  2759. carpeting, strewn with luxuriant clothing. They begin to undress me so they
  2760. can behold the full power of my beauty, and I let them, proud of my figure.
  2761. Then they begin to make love to me and it is wonderful. Such pleasures as I
  2762. have never experienced.
  2763.  
  2764. Soon I am spent, tired of all the pleasure. But they will not stop their
  2765. caresses and soon the pleasure becomes overwhelming there is nothing I can
  2766. do to escape them. The pleasure becomes unbearable. It goes on and on and I
  2767. can do nothing. I want it to end now, but it does not. It goes on forever,
  2768. since there are so many of them they never have to stop. The pleasure is
  2769. now no different than pain and I feel like I am going to die. Finally,
  2770. after an eternity it stops. I know now that the mere thought of such
  2771. pleasure is evil to me. I am not beautiful, but a whore just as Father
  2772. said, and I should not be happy.
  2773.  
  2774. Nor it seems should I be sad. I find myself surrounded by friends, all of
  2775. whom are trying to keep me from being sad. Feeling sad is not proper
  2776. behavior for a woman of my character. I should show no emotions to the
  2777. world, but always be calm an collected. Pleasant but unassuming. The
  2778. easiest way to do this is to not feel at all. They begin to teach me how
  2779. not to feel. I did not think such a thing would be possible, but I actually
  2780. begin to live without feelings.
  2781.  
  2782. The dream seems to move in fast forward at this point, and I live on for
  2783. years, never growing old, always with my little circle of women friends
  2784. telling me how not to feel. I have also sorts of horrid encounters with men
  2785. and women who betray me, hurt me, love me, try and entertain me. Whenever I
  2786. become excited I find myself getting hurt. No emotion works out well for
  2787. me. It is easier to simply have no feelings at all.
  2788.  
  2789. One instance stands out in my dream particularly. I spend much time with my
  2790. circle of women friends, and I grow to trust them as confidants. They at
  2791. least have my best interests at heart. I have vague memories of all the
  2792. horrors my body has undergone in the past: the torture, the mind tricks,
  2793. the endless tasks and the horrible climate. But here for the first time I
  2794. have a group of supporters, people who know how I feel and want to help me.
  2795. People who will show me the way to survive here in this new hell of
  2796. emotions. I have experienced such horrid pain in my heart. Those who I love
  2797. and those who I hate have given me nothing but heartache.
  2798.  
  2799. And then it happens. I do not know why I do not expect it. It's the same
  2800. every time I have the dream but I never seem to learn! My circle of friends
  2801. turns on me. I have revealed my innermost fears to them. I have come to
  2802. depend on them as sources of calm in my tempestuous emotional life. They
  2803. are everything to me. And suddenly they are harsh to me. They reject me at
  2804. every turn, telling me I am unworthy of them, too emotional, not controlled
  2805. enough. They say that they have been all too patient with me over the past
  2806. few years. They have given me their love and respect and I have not
  2807. returned in kind. I protest my innocence but this only drives them further
  2808. from me. They have turned on me, but I know I deserve it all. I am too
  2809. emotional, too uncontrolled for them. I must learn to control myself.
  2810.  
  2811. For the rest of the dream I am alone, wandering as if I am in a dream
  2812. within the dream. I walk through the petty turmoils that surround me, but
  2813. they are nothing to me. I have torn the hurtful, destructive emotions from
  2814. my breast and thrown them to the wind. I am like a walking statue carved by
  2815. some ingenious Greek sculptor. I have every appearance of life, but no fire
  2816. within me. I have learned that feelings lead only to pain and suffering,
  2817. and never to good. The only respite I have from my torturous life is the
  2818. time spent without feeling. It is only when I have fully realized this that
  2819. suddenly the dream changes again, as it always does, and I go slipping down
  2820. again..."
  2821.  
  2822.  
  2823. Now that does not sound so terrible does it? Well, of course it is quite
  2824. terrible, even worse, I think, than the desecrations of the human form so
  2825. popular in the Fourth Circle. Emotions are an integral part of our
  2826. humanity, and stripping them from our soul leaves us virtually lifeless.
  2827. The subtlety and power of the illusions created by the Razides of the Fifth
  2828. Circle are truly stunning. They, more than any others in The Pit go to
  2829. great links to trick humans into thinking that they are not in fact in Hell
  2830. at all, but leading some normal life. Every detail is perfect, and they
  2831. seldom make mistakes. They peer straight into your soul and see those
  2832. things which are most important to you. They dredge up the perfect
  2833. archetypes for your emotions and desires: family, friends, lovers, enemies,
  2834. rivals, anyone you may grow a strong attachment to. They then deconstruct
  2835. that emotion, twisting it in on itself until it becomes its opposite, or
  2836. loses meaning altogether.
  2837.  
  2838. The Fifth Level is certainly marks a trend in the lower levels, a
  2839. sophistication found only below the half-way point. Down here the Circles
  2840. know that if someone has made it this far, they are probably pretty tough.
  2841. The Fifth is not trying to break anyone all the way. Certainly emotional
  2842. turmoil can be every bit as torturous as physical agony, but it may not be
  2843. enough to completely scour the soul of all personality and memory. But if
  2844. they can take away the fundamentally human emotions that set us apart from
  2845. automatons and beasts, then they will have gone a long way in their quest.
  2846. Once that is accomplished, there will be no inner fire, no love or hate to
  2847. sustain the soul as it falls through the next four circles. Razides of the
  2848. Fifth level take pride in their sophistication and worldliness. They are
  2849. often pleasant to talk to, although strangely disquieting. Much like
  2850. talking to a psychotic psychiatrist I suppose.
  2851.  
  2852. One interesting side note. I find it startling and somewhat tragic that poor
  2853. Marlene was forced to live her entire time in Inferno every night in her
  2854. dreams. I have never heard of such a remembrance before or since. Certainly
  2855. it is not unheard of for someone to occasionally have dreams of a
  2856. particular experience in Inferno, or some detail about its geography. But
  2857. to relive the whole thing every night is frightening, if only for the time
  2858. compression involved. I feel certain that Marlene was under the influence
  2859. of some conjurer. Perhaps someone who had managed to combine the Lores of
  2860. Dream, Death, and even Time & Space in such a way as to curse the young
  2861. girl with constantly reliving here sorrow. What she could have done to
  2862. deserve such a fate I do not know, but it is certainly a curious punishment.
  2863.  
  2864.  
  2865. The Sixth Circle
  2866.  
  2867. Below the emotions of the Fifth Level we find the base fears of the Sixth.
  2868. At first this level would seem to directly contradict my statement of a
  2869. moment ago. Being buried alive in scorpions is hardly sophisticated; or so
  2870. one might well argue. But there is more to it than that. This level is
  2871. about taking away your humanity. Up above, in level Three, the soul has
  2872. been stripped of its logical base, rational thought is no longer possible.
  2873. Thinking things through became impossible. In the Fifth Circle the soul
  2874. lost its emotions, that inner essence that keeps us going. Now in level six
  2875. the soul loses the last vestiges of human society, living the life of an
  2876. animal or insect.
  2877.  
  2878. The very atmosphere of the Sixth Circle brings out our basest instincts.
  2879. Every human soul in the level is in a state of constant state of hunger.
  2880. Hunger for food, thirst for drink, hunger for life, fear of everything.
  2881. This hunger is insatiable, and fortunately there is plenty to eat.
  2882. Unfortunately, little of it is what is normally thought of as fit for human
  2883. consumption. for instance most of it is still alive, poisonous, and trying
  2884. to kill you, or at least hurt you a fair amount. Worse yet, some of the
  2885. bugs cannot be seen by the naked eye. Diseases run rampant in the Sixth
  2886. Circle, from viruses to bacteria to cancers that crawl about on their own.
  2887.  
  2888. Naturally enough, it is often hard to find subjects who are able to talk of
  2889. their experiences in the Sixth Circle, at least while they are in the
  2890. middle of their torment. Language skills are among the first things to go
  2891. down there. For this particular story I have called upon the very Legions
  2892. of Hell to provide me with answers. Admittedly that is a rather dramatic
  2893. way of saying that I managed to capture one of the thousands of foot
  2894. soldiers in Astaroth's Legions and ask him a question or two. In life this
  2895. poor fellow was a simple office worker. Just one of many who put in his
  2896. hours every week and saved up money in hopes of some day marrying and
  2897. settling down. Like all men he had his faults. Maybe he was ruthless, maybe
  2898. mean. Maybe he just didn't care for people. Whatever his sin, it was enough
  2899. in his mind and the minds of his peers to end him straight from the street
  2900. where he was run down to Inferno. He proved resilient enough to make it
  2901. through all Nine Circles, and rather than let such a prize go, Hareb-Serap
  2902. took a personal interest in him, drafting him into the Legions. Legionnaire
  2903. Howard Whitman, reporting for duty.
  2904.  
  2905. Howard's Tale
  2906.  
  2907. "Maybe I'm just a cold hearted guy, but I didn't miss whatever it was they
  2908. took away from me in the Fifth Circle. I never was the type to emote well.
  2909. That's why I went into real estate instead of theater like most of my
  2910. friends. One day I simply got up and walked through a door in The Fifth
  2911. that I had never noticed before and I was falling. I fell for miles, it was
  2912. just like sky diving, or at least that's what occurred to me at the time.
  2913. Of course every other time I had gone skydiving I had a parachute...
  2914.  
  2915. Luckily there were the bugs to break my fall. From miles up I could not
  2916. tell what I was falling towards. It was all black from a distance, like
  2917. some great tar pit stretching off for miles. There were no features, no
  2918. landmarks, just black ad infinitum. As I got closer I could see that it was
  2919. moving, I thought maybe it was some kind of ocean. I only had a second to
  2920. register the noise: the scraping, clicking, chittering, before I hit
  2921. bottom. The Impact killed me instantly, but a moment later and I was myself
  2922. again, lying under several feet of cockroaches. Big ass, nasty cockroaches.
  2923. I had no particular fear of them while I was alive, but I certainly didn't
  2924. want to drown in them. Involuntarily I started to scream, and they just
  2925. rushed into my mouth. Into my mouth, my nose, my ears, even up my ass. I
  2926. went crazy. Absolutely nuts. It was as bad as it ever got in The Pit.
  2927.  
  2928. Who knows how long I flailed there, letting myself suffocate over and over
  2929. under the mass of insects. I must have died a hundred times, either through
  2930. heart failure from the terror or just plain suffocation: too many bugs in my
  2931. lungs. Eventually I got my act together enough to start to try and claw my way
  2932. out. The "sea" of cockroaches was, for the most part only about seven feet
  2933. deep, so occasionally I could jump up and find my way to the surface to
  2934. catch a breath of air. Sometimes I would fall into deep pits, tens or even
  2935. hundreds of feet deep, full of roaches. It would take me days and hundreds
  2936. of deaths to work my way out of there. Eventually I did make it somehow,
  2937. although only because They let me.
  2938.  
  2939. Outside the sea things were not much better. I was hungry, hungrier than
  2940. I'd ever been. I stood in some sort of swampy area, it reeked of noxious
  2941. gasses, the air was alive with stinging gnats and flies. There was no
  2942. vegetation, just stones, muck and mud. nothing bigger than a fly to eat.
  2943. Ultimately that is what I was reduced to, trying to snatch insects from the
  2944. air and eat them as I trudged along through the swamp. I suppose I could
  2945. have gone back to the sea of roaches and eaten something there, but I would
  2946. not bring myself to go back to that place. The strength just seemed to leak
  2947. right out of my, and suddenly I knew that I was getting sick. I hadn't been
  2948. sick, actually ill since before I died. Now I could feel it for sure: a
  2949. fever, coughing, running nose the whole works. I was breaking out in
  2950. strange spots and rashes all over.
  2951.  
  2952. I got sicker and sicker as I marched, and soon I couldn't move another
  2953. inch. I lay in a pile of filth and muck, slowly dying. I just lay there. It
  2954. wasn't one of those pleasantly delusional sicknesses either. I was
  2955. constantly, painstakingly aware of everything that was happening to me. It
  2956. was only when I was too weak to move that something besides stinging flies
  2957. and mosquitoes showed their faces. Bigger bugs, rats, snakes, and every
  2958. other kind of vermin stopped by to gnaw on me. I couldn't do a damn thing
  2959. to stop them. Finally, after days of this crap I died. Then I got up and
  2960. started all over again. But now I knew what I was in store for. now I had
  2961. it all figured out. So I drank the mucky water, because, hell, I knew I was
  2962. going to be sick again anyway. I hunted for the vermin. Now I knew where
  2963. they lived, I knew how to get them.
  2964.  
  2965. I survived for what must have been months this time. Living in the muck,
  2966. feeding on snakes and rats. I became no better than the food I ate. There
  2967. was nothing civilized in my existence. Nothing human about it at all. I was
  2968. constantly hungry, constantly looking for food. I was so ravenous that I
  2969. would eventually hunt an area clear of vermin and would have to move on. I
  2970. was constantly ill, constantly vomiting up what I had eaten or dribbling
  2971. out my ass in diuretic streams. There was no hope for me. My body festered
  2972. with bug bites and sores, none of which ever had a chance to heal. It was
  2973. pure animal drive that kept me going as long as I did, and even then I
  2974. died. Of course death was just a new beginning, and it only meant that I
  2975. was stronger for a moment, could hunt better for a few days or weeks. I
  2976. should have stockpiled the food, but the thought never occurred to me. I
  2977. killed everything I saw, and ate everything I killed.
  2978.  
  2979. Finally my nomadic hunting took me to the edge of my swamp, and there I
  2980. found a cave. I crawled in, looking for food. Inside was a cornucopia:
  2981. beetles, scorpions, grubs and maggots, all crawling about in a stinking
  2982. morass of guano and rotting gunk. I gorged myself at this trough, letting
  2983. the protein filled bugs slide on down into my belly. Sometimes they stung,
  2984. sometimes they killed me with their poisons, but I was in heaven. I simply
  2985. lay there and let the food and disease come to me. I must have died a
  2986. thousand times over in that cave. My muscles atrophied, I couldn't walk
  2987. anymore. I might as well not have had legs at all.
  2988.  
  2989. It was only when the locust things came that I was forced to move on. I
  2990. heard them from miles away, but didn't care. I didn't even think as to what
  2991. they might be. It was only when they came into my bug cave that I began to
  2992. fear them. They were all at least a foot long, flying in thick clouds on
  2993. dragonfly wings. They had the bodies of bugs but the head were like rats:
  2994. beady eyes, long snout full of teeth. No fur though, just a nasty jet
  2995. black. They ate everything in site. All my bugs, and then me. I had to run.
  2996. I could not fight them. I could not eat them. They looked delicious but
  2997. there were too many, they were too big.
  2998.  
  2999. I ran and ran, and sometimes I made it a fair distance before they cut me
  3000. down. Their vicious little teeth could strip a man in a few minutes when
  3001. they chose to. Flying pirahanas is what they were. But most of the time
  3002. they just seemed to want to play with me. Taking a few bites out every so
  3003. often, the rest of the time just swarming around me. The sky was black with
  3004. them. I couldn't see a thing. No light, just the merciless buzzing of their
  3005. wings and snapping of their jaws.
  3006.  
  3007. Somehow I escaped them, running in blind, mindless terror, more out of
  3008. habit than anything else. I ran so as not to die. I didn't want to die
  3009. because I was hungry. I wanted to eat. I missed my bug cave and all its
  3010. little biters and gnawers and grubs. I fell into a pit and suddenly they
  3011. were gone. I knew vaguely here I was. It was the Labyrinth, the maze that
  3012. winds through all of The Pit. I didn't realize all of this. I had long ago
  3013. forgotten I was in Hell at all. I new that I was safe, but hungry. I set
  3014. about looking for food. A bug maybe.
  3015.  
  3016. And so I wandered the Labyrinth, no better than a rat in a sewer. I fought
  3017. others over scraps of meat, and ran away from larger packs of humans. We
  3018. weren't men anymore though. We were animals, pure and simple. No worries
  3019. except survival and food. No attachments except to our stomachs. We were
  3020. less than animals really. We didn't even need to procreate. We just were.
  3021.  
  3022. Eventually, somehow I made it out of there. I fell through the wrong
  3023. trapdoor or maybe they just let me go on my merry way. Knowing how things
  3024. work here it was probably the latter. They'd turned me into an animal, and
  3025. now it was time for the hunt."
  3026.  
  3027.  
  3028. So goes Howard's tale. It covers all the significant aspects of the Sixth
  3029. Circle: vermin, disease, dehumanization, and so on. With so much of his
  3030. humanity already stripped away, it was a small step for him. Soon we shall
  3031. see the transformation from mindless animal to mere property in Hell, but
  3032. first there is the Seventh Circle, land of The Great Hunt.
  3033.  
  3034.  
  3035. The Seventh Circle
  3036.  
  3037. We near the end of our descent into the depths of The Pit, and here we see
  3038. the final steps in the processing of human souls. The Seventh Circle is
  3039. really just a playground for Razides and other demons to get their
  3040. aggressions out. It certainly has value to the Infernals in their quest to
  3041. purge humanity of its memories, but I feel there is more to it than that.
  3042. All of the other circles center around the victims, while here the focus is
  3043. the demons. Humans are simply pawns to be toyed with, minor albeit crucial
  3044. parts of the system. The Seventh Circle hosts a constant series of wars,
  3045. duels, gladiatorial combats, death sports, and hunts, with humans being the
  3046. ones who die over and over in the process. A handful of powerful Razides
  3047. numbering less than a hundred rule the entire circle. Even the Citadels of
  3048. the Death Angels infringe very little in the Seventh Circle.
  3049.  
  3050. The Lords of the Seventh Circle care little for Infernal rivalries and
  3051. politics, and, surprisingly, seldom involve themselves in Pit Wars.
  3052. Instead, they keep to their own amusements, fighting mock wars with each
  3053. other, simply for the pleasure of watching humans die in combat. War and
  3054. combat are a way of life for the Lords of the Seventh, and the air is
  3055. always full of the sounds and smells of combat. Naturally enough, The
  3056. Seventh Circle is the area of Inferno most commonly linked with our world
  3057. by temporary portals, especially those formed in war time. For this reason,
  3058. despite its depth in The Pit, the Seventh Circle has one of the highest
  3059. human populations out of all the Circles, since many unfortunate soldiers
  3060. step straight from one battlefield in our world to its counterpart in the
  3061. Seventh Circle. Because these individuals did not die in the traditional
  3062. sense, they are effectively prisoners of the Demon Lords, who in no way
  3063. feel obligated to send them on down The Pit.
  3064.  
  3065. Torment for human souls in this level is constantly hunting or being
  3066. hunted; always fighting for your life. There is also less variety in the
  3067. human experience in the Seventh Circle. The Demon Lords care little for
  3068. varying the tortures they inflict on their prisoners, preferring the
  3069. infinite variety of outcomes war and combat offer them. Thus, most humans
  3070. find themselves repeating the same battles or hunts over and over again for
  3071. all the years they spend in the custody of The Seventh's war lords. It is
  3072. the Razides themselves who move from place to place, enjoying the different
  3073. pleasures their realm has to offer them. Keeping this in mind, I have
  3074. chosen to present the reminiscences of one of those Razides, rather than
  3075. the account of one of their human victims. This particular tale is quite
  3076. rare, and is in fact a letter written by one of the demon lords who
  3077. followed Togarini in his ill fated rebellion against Astaroth. The
  3078. unfortunate Razide was banished into our world with his master, never to
  3079. see the joys of his Seventh Circle again. He apparently wrote the letter in
  3080. reply to some queries made by a death conjurer in the service of Togarini.
  3081. The original is handwritten in blood, the script is really quite elegant
  3082. and is written on vellum.
  3083.  
  3084.  
  3085. To Liam,
  3086.  
  3087. Master bids that I answer your questions. You ask what it was like for me
  3088. as a lord of hell. I will tell you. It was paradise. It was what I was
  3089. created for. It was everything I could ever ask for. I reigned in the
  3090. Seventh Circle of Hell, one of only a few dozen Lords in the entire circle.
  3091. Our power rivaled that of even the Death Angels themselves. We ruled
  3092. absolutely in our realms and every pleasure was ours, including the
  3093. greatest pleasure of all: War.
  3094.  
  3095. We fought among each other constantly, but not out of spite or greed or
  3096. malice, but for the shear joy of battle. Each of us had under our sway an
  3097. army of demons that could have destroyed every army in human history, but
  3098. it was not with these armies that we fought. Demons cannot be killed in
  3099. their own land, and so do not fear death. More importantly they do not fear
  3100. pain, for pain is our primary motivator. There is no sense of risk when
  3101. demons fight, no fear to drive a warrior to extraordinary lengths. We
  3102. fought with armies of humans, poor frail, easily killed yet easily reborn
  3103. humans. It was their inbred fear of death and will to survive that made
  3104. watching them so enjoyable.
  3105.  
  3106. Each war and battle was carefully thought out beforehand by myself and my
  3107. fellow Razides. We strove constantly to fight new battles, or re-fight old
  3108. battles in different ways. Sometimes we would set our human pawns against
  3109. each other in recreation of other famous human battles, simply to relive
  3110. the joy of fights long since lost and won. The Battle of the Somme was
  3111. particularly popular right before I fell from my high seat, and we would
  3112. often fight it a hundred times with small variations, just to see what the
  3113. humans would do. The humans always played the same part again and again,
  3114. but would remember every battle that had gone before. It was quite
  3115. interesting to watch them learn from their mistakes and see the interesting
  3116. evolutions the battle went through. Sometimes, just to make it interesting
  3117. we would change something significant in the middle of the battle, such as
  3118. changing the Germans into Spartans, or moving the scene of the battle from
  3119. the trenches of Europe to a sweltering jungle.
  3120.  
  3121. Of course we were just as inventive when coming up with our own battles,
  3122. campaigns that could never be fought in the world of the living. The
  3123. uniquely malleable geography of Inferno allows for plenty of interesting
  3124. variations. Sometimes we would pit medieval armies against hordes of demons
  3125. on a plane of fire. Other times we would allow the humans to ride terrible
  3126. creatures of our creation into battle; anything from giant beetle like
  3127. things, to flying worms reminiscent of dragons. Underground battles were
  3128. always a favorite of mine: armies trying to fight each other in a
  3129. constantly shifting maze. The confusion, fear, and frustration fill the
  3130. air, along with the blood and death.
  3131.  
  3132. There are certain facts of Infernal existence that had to be dealt with,
  3133. first of all being the tendency of humans to rejuvenate immediately upon
  3134. death. We circumvented this problem by making it almost impossible for a
  3135. man to die in our circle. It is just as easy to wound, maim, or disable,
  3136. it's just that they cannot die. Wounds that would normally kill simply
  3137. leave the human lying in agony, unable to do anything but experience pain.
  3138. We found long ago that this keeps them from immediately killing themselves
  3139. in order to escape the horrors of war. It is important that they have an
  3140. incentive to fight on, and the fear of pain seems to do the trick. Those
  3141. that come down from the Sixth Circle usually do not need much
  3142. encouragement. They have already been stripped down to the point where they
  3143. will do anything to survive. They are hardly human anymore, more like
  3144. animals, which makes them perfectly suited for the hunts (which I shall
  3145. discuss shortly). It is the walk-ins, those who stray over from Elysium
  3146. when the barriers are weak, who need encouragement to keep on fighting.
  3147. They have not been broken in the upper levels of The Pit, and so are not
  3148. used to the inevitability of their fate. This makes them much more
  3149. interesting subjects, for they believe our lies when we tell them that if
  3150. they fight well enough they will be able to escape some day.
  3151.  
  3152. Sometimes a full scale battle is not what we were in the mood for. The high
  3153. drama of man to man combat can be just as compelling, and we would often
  3154. stage such gladiatorial bloodfests. Here they would fight until one or the
  3155. other was incapacitated (remember we made it impossible to die), then we
  3156. would revive the fallen warrior to a state of perfect health and let the
  3157. fight continue. This was often enjoyable sport for upwards of a week of
  3158. constant fighting, depending on how good the fighters were. We certainly
  3159. never took the time to train them. Why bother when you can learn by doing?
  3160. They usually picked it up quickly enough. Of course we had a lot more
  3161. weapons than the Romans, everything from human history, and much that
  3162. hasn't been thought of outside of Hell. This made for nearly infinite
  3163. variety.
  3164.  
  3165. The Great Hunts were one of my favorite times, for they offered me a chance
  3166. to get involved in the fun personally. We would often come together at this
  3167. point, and create wondrous hunting grounds filled with all kinds of horrors
  3168. and hiding places for our prey. Then we would release a few humans into the
  3169. grounds, give them a good head start, and head out after them. Hell hounds,
  3170. our own special birds of prey, and other Infernal creatures accompanied us
  3171. on our hunts, sniffing out the fearful prey. Those humans who survived the
  3172. Sixth Circle somewhat intact were by far the best, for they had been
  3173. stripped down to their animal instincts. Eventually we would beat even
  3174. those out of them after too many hunts. Then they were of no use to us, and
  3175. we sent them either on to the Demiurge or down The Pit the Eighth Circle.
  3176.  
  3177. There was never any down time for our pawns, even during these gladiatorial
  3178. shows or the hunts, when only a few of them were being used. Sometimes we
  3179. would lone them out to other Lords who were planning large battles. Other
  3180. times we put them away in their cupboards: dark metal boxes the size of
  3181. coffins standing on end. Inside the humans were subjected to a series of
  3182. visions and hallucinations about war and combat; real enough that they
  3183. would not lose their edge. To be perfectly honest, we seldom used the
  3184. boxes, for there was always a battle to be fought somewhere, and it seemed
  3185. a shame to waste the human fighting spirit.
  3186.  
  3187. Eventually of course every human would wear out. It would either become a
  3188. simple killing machine, more robot than man, not fearing death or even
  3189. pain. These were of no use to us. They were too far gone, too close to
  3190. being finished. Others simply lost it completely, their minds shut down and
  3191. they could do nothing but lie there or stand and get shot down. Again,
  3192. useless for our pleasures. Sometimes the turn over rate would get so high
  3193. that we would have a shortage of good subjects. It was then that it was
  3194. occasionally necessary to mount expeditions to the higher Circles and take
  3195. some souls before they were too damaged. This made us many enemies, but
  3196. there were none in all The Pit save perhaps Astaroth and Hareb-Serap who
  3197. could match us for our military genius. Whatever we wanted, we took, and
  3198. they should be thankful we left them anything at all.
  3199.  
  3200. But then I was betrayed, and my Master fell before the Lord of Hell
  3201. himself. Now I reside among the living instead of the dead. Still I play my
  3202. games, pitting humans against one another, knowing however that every time
  3203. I do the joy is only fleeting. I send the dead on to my fellow Lords still
  3204. in The Pit, who will have the joy of them for years to come. I hope they
  3205. appreciate all I do for them.
  3206.  
  3207.  
  3208. As you can see, the human element is not terribly important in the Seventh
  3209. Circle. Certainly it is one of the most dangerous areas to visit in all of
  3210. Inferno, as it is constantly at war with itself. The danger of a stray
  3211. bullet or arrow trapping you there forever is just too great in my opinion.
  3212. Unless of course you can manage to somehow become a guest of one of the
  3213. Razide war lords. Then you might have a very interesting time.
  3214.  
  3215.  
  3216. The Eighth Circle
  3217.  
  3218. The Eighth Circle of Hell is a curious place. At first glance its tortures
  3219. seem simplistic compared to other levels, but once one see beyond the
  3220. surface, the truly insidious nature of this hell becomes apparent. I choose
  3221. for my story the remembrances of a pleasant young woman, Christine Lorenzo
  3222. of Athens, Georgia. Christine had a remarkably accurate memory of her past
  3223. lives and her time in hell, although it took deep hypnosis to draw the more
  3224. terrifying memories from her. The result of all these past lives running
  3225. around in her head was that, by the time I met her, Christine was really
  3226. quite mad. Nevertheless, I was able to obtain some valuable gems of
  3227. information from her muddled mind.
  3228.  
  3229. This particular extract from my notes is Christine's account of her time in
  3230. the Eighth Circle. She had very vivid memories of all the previous circles
  3231. as well, but it seems it was the Eighth that finally broke her. The Eighth
  3232. circle is the realm of slavery, where human souls become the servants of
  3233. their hellish lords. The lords of hell often represent themselves as
  3234. beautiful human or quasi-human beings. They live in lush surroundings, with
  3235. beautiful gardens, homes, and cities. They live a life of luxury at every
  3236. turn, served hand and foot by their human servants.
  3237.  
  3238. This in itself does not sound so bad, but as you might expect, the resident
  3239. Razides and Nepharites are the sternest of masters. They will strike out
  3240. with furious vengeance at the slightest mistake on the part of their
  3241. servants. They can be every bit as creative in these tortures as the other
  3242. lords of hell, but the torture is all the worse since the human servants
  3243. know that if they had acted without making a mistake there would be no
  3244. punishment. They bring every torture upon themselves. As we shall see,
  3245. given the nature of their servitude, avoiding making a mistake is harder
  3246. than one might think.
  3247.  
  3248. Christine's Story
  3249.  
  3250. I woke up to find myself in yet another dank, cold dungeon, lit this time
  3251. by a crude iron lantern. Such surroundings were by this time commonplace in
  3252. my damned existence, and I took some comfort in them. At least it was
  3253. better than the horrors I had experienced mere moments before.
  3254.  
  3255. Of course my rest was short lived. The door swung wide revealing a gigantic
  3256. hunchbacked man. It only took me a few seconds to realize it was of course
  3257. not a man but a demon of some sort. He stared at my dirty, naked form for a
  3258. moment, then strode forward and grabbed me by the hair, pulling me kicking
  3259. and screaming down a stone corridor. He moved too fast for me to get my
  3260. feet under me, and soon I gave up my struggle, succumbing to the numbing
  3261. pain.
  3262.  
  3263. I was hurled by my hair down a flight of stairs, only to be snatched up
  3264. again by another hunchbacked demon. The second hunchback slung me over his
  3265. shoulder and started to carry me along at a rapid pace. I slowly became
  3266. aware of my surroundings at that point. Looking through bruise swollen eyes
  3267. I began to understand that I was in some sort of factory or warehouse. All
  3268. around me were these hunchbacked demons, operating strange machinery,
  3269. moving boxes from one place to another, or pouring foul liquids into
  3270. steaming vats. The factory floor was vast, and I could see neither walls
  3271. nor a ceiling in the dim light.
  3272.  
  3273. My captor brought me to what I assumed to be the center of the room. We
  3274. emerged from behind a towering stack of iron cubes to see an arena of some
  3275. sort. There were nine tiers to the arena, connected by serpentine stairways
  3276. that twisted and turned down to the center of the pit. In a way it was
  3277. like a miniature model of the Great Pit itself, although the word
  3278. "miniature" belies the great size of the pit the spread out before me. On
  3279. every level their were more of these hunchbacked demons, although all of
  3280. these seemed to be tending to human captives in some way.
  3281.  
  3282. Thick smoke of some sort wafted up from the center of the pit, making it
  3283. impossible to tell what was going on down in the lower levels of the pit. I
  3284. could see only dim outlines of humans and hunchbacked demons. The humans
  3285. seemed to be crowded together in little clusters while the hunchbacked
  3286. demons moved between the groups. At the time I did not realize the
  3287. significance of what I saw, and scarcely noticed it. My attention turned
  3288. almost immediately to the first level of the pit which we were now rapidly
  3289. approaching. There I could see several other people, all of them bound to
  3290. various medieval torture apparati. I found this both frightening and
  3291. strangely comforting. At least it was familiar. I had been through this
  3292. before.
  3293.  
  3294. Of course I should have realized the truth, but one's mind does the
  3295. damnedest things to try and keep you from facing the horrible truth. The
  3296. torture on the first level of the pit was just a formality, or maybe some
  3297. sort of payment for the services of the hunchbacks. After only a few days
  3298. of torture I was released from my torment, with one addition. I now had
  3299. solid black iron collars around my neck, wrists and ankles. I was informed
  3300. that I was to be a servant in the palace of some great Nepharite, a thought
  3301. that filled me with silent dread.
  3302.  
  3303. It was worse than I could have imagined. As I've said a thousand times,
  3304. these guys really have their stuff together when it comes to messing with
  3305. your head. I don't know what I was expecting for the palace of a Nepharite.
  3306. Something big and scary, full of screaming victims and demons. The truth
  3307. was actually far, far more disturbing. The Nepharite in question lived in
  3308. what has to be the most beautiful home I have ever seen and am ever likely
  3309. to see. It was truly a palace, built along the lines of the Doge's Palace
  3310. in Venice. It was situated beside a beautiful, placid lake in the center of
  3311. miles of well manicured gardens.
  3312.  
  3313. I only got a glimpse of all this however, just enough to make my heart rise
  3314. at the sight of such beauty. I was seated in the back of a large, iron
  3315. carriage, chained to the walls along with about a dozen other new servants.
  3316. We could only catch brief glimpses of the outside through cracks in the
  3317. shutters that blocked the rest of the world from our view. This was part of
  3318. their genius. They gave us just enough to comprehend that there was
  3319. something beautiful out there, but not enough to time to relish it or take
  3320. comfort in it.
  3321.  
  3322. We were unloaded from the carriage in a carriage house, and sent downstairs
  3323. into the basement. We were to share a small, dank room, with only bare
  3324. mattresses to sleep on. Still, it was better than what we were used to. Our
  3325. trainer was one of the hunchbacked demons who had greeted us on our
  3326. arrival. He told us that we were a team now, and that if any of us failed
  3327. in our duties, the whole team would pay the penalty. We didn't have to ask
  3328. what the penalty was, we knew we didn't want to find out.
  3329.  
  3330. The rules of the place were simple. We were never to speak under any
  3331. circumstances, nor were we to ever take our eyes from the ground. We must
  3332. always obey the orders of any of the members of the lord's house. The
  3333. hunchback provided us uniforms that we had to wear always. They had a
  3334. certain 18th century quality to them, and were made from a coarse,
  3335. uncomfortable material. Our team was assigned to service, meaning we would
  3336. serve the lord his meals and drinks. It sounded easy enough, and I began to
  3337. relax, thinking this might not be so bad after all.
  3338.  
  3339. When it came time for us to serve, we were ushered up a hidden stairway
  3340. that opened into the grand kitchen. It was truly a beautiful sight,
  3341. pristine and fully equipped to prepare a gourmet banquet for a hundred
  3342. guests. The cooks had already come and gone, and the food was laid out for
  3343. us. We took up trays and proceeded into the dining room. Beyond the door a
  3344. large dinner party was just getting under way. With our eyes on the ground
  3345. we could only see the feet of those we served. I stole a quick glance and
  3346. was startled to see the hall populated not be demons, but by thirty of the
  3347. most beautiful men and women I had ever seen. The lord of the palace sat at
  3348. the head of the table, a handsome, distinguished gentleman in his
  3349. mid-fifties. I didn't know what to make of this, so I set about serving the
  3350. food. The guests didn't pay us any notice, and soon our job was done. We
  3351. served seven course, poured wine and cleared the table over the course of
  3352. the next four hours. When all was done we were marched back to our cell.
  3353.  
  3354. It was then that we learned just how badly we had done. The hunchback was
  3355. in a rage. He lashed out at us with a short, wooden club. I had touched the
  3356. wine glass with the wine bottle. One of the others had looked up. Another
  3357. had said excuse me. Another had accidentally clinked the water glass with
  3358. the plate he was setting down. The list of seemingly insignificant mistakes
  3359. was huge. How the hunchback even knew what we had done was beyond me, since
  3360. he had not been in the room. Each mistake was worth fifty lashes, and each
  3361. of us was lashed for the mistakes of everyone. I lost count, but he must
  3362. have struck us all well over a thousand times a piece. He assured us that
  3363. since it was our first time he was being lenient.
  3364.  
  3365. He wasn't exaggerating either. The worst was yet to come. We became
  3366. obsessed with not making mistakes, for we knew the penalty if we did. It
  3367. was now impossible to take pleasure in the beauty that surrounded us, so
  3368. fearful were we of misbehaving in some way. Of course we did make mistakes
  3369. again, and pretty soon it wasn't enough to torture us in retribution for
  3370. our crimes. We were sent back to the factory area I had seen when I first
  3371. arrived. We were sent back into the pit, this time down to the second level.
  3372.  
  3373. Our latest infraction had been to raise our eyes from the ground on more
  3374. than one occasion. We had been serving in a garden party, and the
  3375. temptation of looking on such beauty proved too much. In punishment the
  3376. hunchback said he would make sure we never looked up again. In the torture
  3377. chambers of the pit they made us all stand with our heads bent forward as
  3378. far as they would go. They then placed an iron plate at the back of our
  3379. necks, angled so that we could not raise our heads from their stooped
  3380. position. The iron plate was then riveted into our very flesh, an
  3381. excruciating process that caused me to pass out from the pain. When I awoke
  3382. the pain remained, burning into my back and neck. I could not raise my head
  3383. an inch, and already I was starting to cramp and grow stiff.
  3384.  
  3385. We had to continue service in such a condition, working though the pain and
  3386. humiliation of our new fetters. Of course this only made service more
  3387. difficult, and soon we were making mistakes again. We cursed ourselves for
  3388. our stupidity, knowing that if we just concentrated on what we were doing,
  3389. we could avoid all of these problems. That was the true measure of the
  3390. torture we faced. It was all avoidable if we were only better servants. The
  3391. demon lords were not trying to make us mess up. They did not change the
  3392. rules without telling us. We knew what we had to do, but eventually one of
  3393. us always messed up. Then it was back to the pit.
  3394.  
  3395. Our third trip to the pit they added iron blinders to the side of our
  3396. heads, bolting them to our temples. Were we not already dead, the shock
  3397. would surely have killed us. As it was, we were able to keep functioning,
  3398. despite our pain. When one of us talked we went back again to have our
  3399. tongues nailed to the bottom of our mouths in order to prevent speech. Then
  3400. one of the girls groaned during lunch, so it was back again to have our
  3401. voice boxes removed with a pair of pliers. The hunchback who tended us
  3402. yelled and screamed for hours, saying that we needed to learn to work as a
  3403. team or we would never amount to anything.
  3404.  
  3405. One spilled drop of soup and we were back in the pit, the hunchback
  3406. haranguing us the entire way. It seems that it was time for us to truly
  3407. learn the meaning of team work. We were already a pretty sorry looking lot,
  3408. welded bits of black iron covering our bodies, constantly dripping pus and
  3409. blood onto our normally clean uniforms. Once again we tried to steel
  3410. ourselves to whatever new torture we had earned for ourselves. As it turned
  3411. out, the "torture" proved to be nothing more than a length of chain. The
  3412. hunchback fastened the chain to each of our iron collars, binding the
  3413. twelve of us together, separated by less than three feet of chain from the
  3414. next person down the line. Together we formed a circle, chained together
  3415. for eternity.
  3416.  
  3417. This made our work much more difficult, but still we managed to make it
  3418. through one meal without committing any errors. But it was difficulty to do
  3419. one's duty when you have to worry about what everyone else was doing as
  3420. well, and eventually one of us slipped up again and it was back to the pit.
  3421. At first they just made the lengths of chain shorter. Then, when that
  3422. didn't work, they undid the chains from our collars and bolted them
  3423. directly into our flesh, adding another iron accouterment to our uniforms.
  3424.  
  3425. We were by this time quite a sight to behold. We looked more like machines
  3426. than human beings, what with the wide variety of iron plates, bolts, and
  3427. chains attached to us. Work was becoming almost impossible. With our
  3428. tongues nailed down and our eyes all but covered it was impossible to
  3429. communicate with one another. We were bumbling masses of flesh, each trying
  3430. to fight through the pain or our predicament. It wasn't long before we
  3431. missteped yet again, and were back to the pit.
  3432.  
  3433. This time we were in the bottom of the pit, the last torture they had to
  3434. inflict upon us. They took metal cable about an inch thick and inserted it
  3435. directly into our heads, actually touching the brain. They connected us
  3436. together much as the chains did, but suddenly we could hear every though of
  3437. every other member of the group. We suddenly had access to all their
  3438. feelings, all their memories, all their pain. It was too much for me and I
  3439. passed out, as did some others. When I came to the sensation remained,
  3440. although now I was getting used to it. My brain, in its own defense, and
  3441. withdrawn into the mass mind that was forming between us. We could now
  3442. communicate perfectly with one another, allowing us to do our jobs without
  3443. messing things up again.
  3444.  
  3445. The cost however was too great. We were no longer human, we were one giant
  3446. machine. All sense of self was gone, all sense of who we had been. Sharing
  3447. the torments of eleven others who had gone through what I had gone through
  3448. in hell was just too much. My brain shut down, and we became an automaton.
  3449. There was nothing left for us to do but serve in that beautiful palace, a
  3450. beauty that was entirely lost on us, for we were now one without feeling. I
  3451. do not know how long we remained thus, for it is my last memory of hell.
  3452. Surprisingly, it is not a bad memory. It was a good feeling, a feeling that
  3453. finally I had found my place in the world.
  3454.  
  3455.  
  3456. The Ninth Circle
  3457.  
  3458. So at last we come to the end of our voyage to through the depths of
  3459. Inferno's Great Circles. At the bottom we find the most select souls, those
  3460. rare few who can survive all eight previous levels with their mind and soul
  3461. intact. Take a moment and contemplate the kind of mental fortitude it takes
  3462. to go through all of Hell that I have described thus far. Truly, it is hard
  3463. for many us to imagine surviving any one circle intact, much less all
  3464. eight. To make it to the bottom, one needs be made of very stern stuff. One
  3465. has to have a certain affinity for the very tortures you are supposed to
  3466. hate. There is simply no other way to pass through the ordeals of the upper
  3467. levels. To come through them all entirely unscathed is impossible. Even
  3468. those who retain some of themselves down to the Ninth Circle have had a
  3469. rough time of it. They are questioning many things about themselves, and
  3470. about who they are. After all what kind of a man can go through such
  3471. horrors and not question his own identity?
  3472.  
  3473. In the Ninth, identities are changed, and their are only two ways out.
  3474. Either one loses whatever he or she has left in themselves, or they give in
  3475. to the joys of Inferno, never to leave its boundaries again. My advice:
  3476. give in if you can. Eternity in Astaroth's realm without hope of reprieve
  3477. is hardly worth living. Certainly you will no longer be human, no longer a
  3478. god. The final Razides of the lowest circle are on a very special quest,
  3479. they seek to separate the merely human from those rare beings who have
  3480. become somewhat Infernal themselves.
  3481.  
  3482. For my final selection on the Circles I have chosen a rather old piece,
  3483. something from over two hundred years ago. Here I present the story of Shen
  3484. Xiao, a Chinese nobleman confined to The Pit upon his death in 1767, and
  3485. whose soul has only escaped Inferno's torments in the past twenty years. He
  3486. was a brilliant man of sound character and righteous Confucian upbringing.
  3487. He did his share of wrongs during his life, but no more than any other
  3488. ambitious man. Murdered one night by his own son, he woke up to find
  3489. himself in The First Circle. He passed on down through The Pit, clashing
  3490. his strong will against that of his oppressors. Never did a stronger man
  3491. enter The Pit, but he eventually succumbed to the inevitable. By the time
  3492. he had reached the Ninth level he was almost unstrung. It was then that he
  3493. wrote this confession, in one last attempt to hold on to himself. Of course
  3494. it did no good, for he finally did succumb.
  3495.  
  3496.  
  3497. Xiao's Tale
  3498.  
  3499. "I have come a long way through the tortures of the Earth Prison, and now I
  3500. am almost through it. Here in this new hell, there is time for quiet
  3501. reflection, something not offered to me at any time before. This cannot be
  3502. anything but another trick on the part of the demons who keep me here. The
  3503. more time I have to contemplate my fate in this comfortable room, the more
  3504. I realize all that I have lost. I am no longer a man, for I have no manly
  3505. qualities. I have no feelings, I have no desires. I am but an empty shell,
  3506. less even than the lowliest animal. I no longer know what I am.
  3507.  
  3508. This is something I would never have dreamed of. I have always been taught
  3509. that the world is carefully organized and ordered. Everything has a place,
  3510. and a duty and a destiny. I have no duty, I have no place. If I once had a
  3511. family, their memory is long gone from me. I remember only a life of pain,
  3512. here in the pits of the Earth Prison. I no longer even know why I am here,
  3513. although it must have something to do with the demons who surround me at
  3514. every turn. I remember their kind from the other hells of the Earth Prison,
  3515. but in this new place they have treated me kindly, at least for the few
  3516. days I have been here.
  3517.  
  3518. * * *
  3519.  
  3520. I have just had a most interesting conversation with one of the demons. I
  3521. suppose I should say, with one of my fellow demons, although I am not at
  3522. all sure that is true. Still, his version of matters seems to make sense,
  3523. and it would explain a great many things. Things I myself have no
  3524. explanation for. Things like why I am here and where I came from. I have
  3525. vague memories of a time before the Earth Prison. Shadows of a former life
  3526. still haunt me, but like all shadows, they are impossible to catch hold of.
  3527.  
  3528. My friend told me that I am, by birth, a demon. It is my duty, my place in
  3529. life to torture humans in retribution for their sins. This at first seemed
  3530. entirely wrong to me. How could this be, when all my life I have been
  3531. tortured a thousand different ways. My companion told me that I was
  3532. mistaken, that there was no past of torture. He said these were not
  3533. memories but visions inspired by my birth. He claims that I was born into
  3534. this world only yesterday, that I am a demon now and always will be. Those
  3535. memories are all false. It would be nice to believe him. It would explain a
  3536. great deal. It would explain why I can't remember anything but pain and
  3537. suffering before yesterday. You see, pain and suffering give birth to
  3538. demons. My memories are not of me being tortured. No, they are the memories
  3539. of my parents. This seems to make a kind of sense, but still seems wrong to
  3540. me.
  3541.  
  3542. We talked for a long while my, my friend and I. He told me of the wonders
  3543. of my homeland. He told me that I could one day be a great and powerful
  3544. Demon Lord because I was born in the Ninth Circle, the luckiest of all
  3545. Circles. We get only the best souls to torture, and we may do whatever we
  3546. wish. All the rest of hell, with the exception of the King of Hell himself
  3547. admire our status and envy our power. We are the first among the fallen. He
  3548. told me that the demons of the other Circles are confined to a particular
  3549. kind of torture, and are forbidden by The King of Hell to perform any
  3550. others, but we of The Ninth and Greatest Circle may do what we please with
  3551. the souls that come down to us. We are truly masters of ourselves and those
  3552. lesser beings around us.
  3553.  
  3554. I was somewhat disturbed by these last statements. I had in me no desire to
  3555. hurt for pain's sake. I did not want to torture others. I could not imagine
  3556. how my genteel companion could take pleasure in such barbarous activities.
  3557. I began to distrust him at once. I was not like him at all. I was no demon.
  3558. I was sure of it then, but he continued to talk with me and now I am not so
  3559. sure. Certainly all the evidence points towards my being a demon. I am
  3560. treated with tenderness and respect by my fellows, all of whom are very
  3561. understanding. They tell me that it is not at all unusual for a new born be
  3562. as confused as I am. I will have to think on it some more. Now I am tired,
  3563. and my bed calls out to me.
  3564.  
  3565. * * *
  3566.  
  3567. My friend came around this morning with some food. It smelled very good and
  3568. I ate it with great relish. It was delicious, and I asked if I might have
  3569. some more. He said of course, but that I would have to help him prepare it.
  3570. I agreed, thankful of the opportunity to learn how to prepare such a dish.
  3571. As it turned out, the meat in the dish was carved from the side of a living
  3572. human boy, who screamed loudly as I cut from his thighs. For an instant I
  3573. felt somewhat strange, a feeling I cannot explain. But once my friend
  3574. handed me the knife I had no problem carving into the meat-boy. It seems
  3575. that I must indeed be a demon to be able to do such a thing to a human. I
  3576. learned how to make the dish, and it was really quite delicious, although
  3577. not quite as good as the bowl my friend had prepared for me.
  3578.  
  3579. We spent the rest of the day wandering in and out of the fantastic tunnels
  3580. that make up most of my homeland. We passed through every conceivable
  3581. variety of torture chamber, many of which were familiar to me. Everywhere
  3582. we turned there were human souls being tortured. I felt somewhat ashamed
  3583. because I did not feel the same delight at these sights as my companion
  3584. obviously did. Nevertheless, I played along and pretended to enjoy the
  3585. visions of agony that spread out before me.
  3586.  
  3587. Torture seemed to be the main occupation of my fellow demons, although
  3588. occasionally we would meet others who seemed to be simply walking about
  3589. leisurely as we were. My friend explained to me that these were other
  3590. new-born demons and their mentors. He said that every new-born has a mentor
  3591. to help them grow accustomed to life in the Earth Prison. I said that I
  3592. thought this a very good practice, and he agreed with me. He told me I was
  3593. coming along very quickly, and that he was proud of me. My heart swelled
  3594. with pride until he told me that soon I would be able to perform my own
  3595. tortures. I felt my stomach turn at the idea. I was not sure I could do it,
  3596. but I smiled and thanked him for the compliment.
  3597.  
  3598. * * *
  3599.  
  3600. Tomorrow I am to be given my first human charge. The method of torture is
  3601. left up to me, and I cannot seem to choose. I have spent the last few days
  3602. in deep conversation with my mentor. He has explained to me all of the
  3603. horrible things that men do to each other in the land of the living. He has
  3604. explained to me why they need to be punished, why they need to have their
  3605. souls scoured clean of the memory of their past sins. I hate humans. They
  3606. are so selfish, so petty, so foolish. They deserve more pain than we can
  3607. give them, and now I look forward to having at my first victim. I believe I
  3608. will start with the lash. I seem to have a certain affinity for it, and my
  3609. mentor suggested it as a first choice.
  3610.  
  3611. * * *
  3612.  
  3613. I have failed as a demon. I could not perform when it came time to carry
  3614. out the human's punishment. I have disgraced my mentor and myself. He was
  3615. very angry, and has promised that if I don not come around soon, I will be
  3616. destroyed. If I cannot be a torturer than what am I? What will become of
  3617. me? I know no other life."
  3618.  
  3619.  
  3620. That is the full extent of the manuscript, written in blood with Infernal
  3621. characters. I recovered it from the archives of the Ninth Circle myself.
  3622. Xiao went on back into our world. He proved to be no demon, but certainly
  3623. none of his humanity remained either. He was a perfect tabula rasa,
  3624. suitably for rebirth. If he had proved capable of performing the deeds
  3625. asked of him he might never have left Inferno. He would have instead become
  3626. a Razide of sorts himself, serving Astaroth for the rest of his days. There
  3627. are a few that do fall into such a fate, but most who pass through the
  3628. Ninth Circle move on back into the living world. Such is our fate.
  3629.  
  3630.  
  3631. Chapter Six:
  3632.  
  3633. The Wild Zones
  3634.  
  3635. Having dealt in with the Great Circles in some detail, I find myself at
  3636. somewhat of a loss for material about the next section of Inferno, the
  3637. so-called Wild Zones. If the Circles are the Center of things in Astaroth's
  3638. realm, then the Wild Zones are everything else. As you can imagine, in a
  3639. place of infinite space, that is quite a bit. Truly anything exists out
  3640. there in the Wild Zones, for it exists simply to be molded by the hands of
  3641. the Infernals. It is, if you will, their playground, the place where they
  3642. experiment with their own plans and desires without having to worry about
  3643. the interesting but time-consuming business of destroying human memories.
  3644. When I say "they" I of course refer to Astaroth himself and his Death
  3645. Angels, for truly they are the only ones who really have much leisure time
  3646. and free will in Inferno these days. Everything else is working too hard at
  3647. surviving or making it difficult for others to survive.
  3648.  
  3649. I make here a few notes concerning some of the more important areas in the
  3650. Wild Zones, particularly those related to the true lords of Inferno. Much
  3651. of what I said earlier about traveling in Inferno applies particularly to
  3652. the Wild Zones. Geography is in constant flux, and there are no set paths
  3653. for an outsider to follow from one place to another. Some kind of guide is
  3654. absolutely necessary here, unless you are exceptionally good at blazing
  3655. your own trails. Weather is in constant flux, and precipitation can be
  3656. anything from rain to blood to frogs to diamonds: literally anything. Many
  3657. temporary and permanent portals open up into a location somewhere within
  3658. the Wild Zones, and it is not uncommon to find poor lost souls wandering
  3659. across the landscape, vainly searching for some way back home. Others are
  3660. those who have managed to escape from The Pit, going straight from one hell
  3661. to another.
  3662.  
  3663. Packs of feral Razides roam the countryside, hunting down and tearing human
  3664. souls to pieces, dragging them back to their lairs or to their masters in
  3665. The Pit. There are few fates worse than becoming a permanent meal for a
  3666. feral Razide, your flesh constantly regenerating each time you die so that
  3667. your ravenous host can continue eating. This can be a good stalling tactic
  3668. however, especially if you have a human companion to sacrifice. They will
  3669. spend weeks gnawing on him until they finally grow weary of his taste.
  3670. Remember, it is impossible to kill Razide on its home territory, you can
  3671. merely immobilize for a short while, so be sure to move on quickly from any
  3672. Razide "kills" you manage to rack up.
  3673.  
  3674. As representative if the Wild Zones I have picked a few areas that are
  3675. beyond a doubt important. Some of them are well known throughout Inferno,
  3676. others are infamous for their obscurity. You will see what I mean. We begin
  3677. then with one of the more important features of today's Inferno: The
  3678. Marshaling Fields.
  3679.  
  3680. The Marshaling Fields
  3681.  
  3682. Since he created Inferno Astaroth has been building up his Legion of the
  3683. Damned. For what purpose he started such an entity I have no answer. Mayhap
  3684. he anticipated that the day would come when The Demiurge would disappear
  3685. and he would take his army into the illusory land of the living. Certainly
  3686. in Inferno, Razides and other Infernals make for a more useful armed force.
  3687. They can be forced into unflagging submission and loyalty with the simplest
  3688. of spells, and they are immune to the effects of death. Why then create an
  3689. army of fallen humans? It seems obvious that the power of humanity lies in
  3690. its godhead, its ability to think for itself and be creative. Also, humans
  3691. are much more stable when they are back on their home ground, while demons
  3692. tend to go a little wild and get uncontrollable when released upon our
  3693. world. Perhaps Astaroth simply enjoys the irony of having an army of fallen
  3694. gods. Whatever his reasons, there can be no doubt that such an army exists
  3695. and that it is among us even as we speak.
  3696.  
  3697. The Marshaling Fields have been the training grounds and base of operations
  3698. for the Legions since their inception. Until recently, most of the Legions
  3699. were stationed in bases here, but now many are active in our world. The
  3700. area contains miles and miles of bleak, muddy fields where the legionaries
  3701. are made to drill incessantly. In the glory days of the marshaling fields a
  3702. million men and women would march in step across the fields for days on
  3703. end, singing songs of praise for their lord Astaroth. Under the constant
  3704. tutelage of Hareb-Serap and the Prince of Darkness himself, they were
  3705. trained in every form of combat known to human history: past, present, and
  3706. future. With the malleable nature of Inferno it was easy for the Death
  3707. Angel to transform the Marshaling Fields into whatever form necessary for
  3708. training. each soldier has become well versed in jungle warfare, arctic
  3709. warfare, desert warfare, and even under water warfare.
  3710.  
  3711. War games and military exercises were constantly under way. These somewhat
  3712. resembled the conflicts staged in The Pit, but they were more expressly for
  3713. the purpose of training excellent troops rather than breaking down souls.
  3714. Remember, these are all men and women who have survived the horrors of The
  3715. Pit themselves. They are beyond the capacity to feel pain or sorrow. They
  3716. now seek only to serve their masters to the bitter end. Astaroth has
  3717. instilled in them a burning hatred for humanity and the living world. Most
  3718. do not even believe they are human any more. In many ways they are not.
  3719. Centuries of torture and manipulation have altered them beyond repair.
  3720. Their bodies have become as warped and monstrous as their souls, and they
  3721. can probably never go back to what they once were.
  3722.  
  3723. Now that Astaroth has taken his ten Legions into our world, the Marshaling
  3724. Fields are all but empty. Only a few Razides remain to train new recruits.
  3725. Where once a million legionaries marched in step, now only a few hundred
  3726. can be mustered. Still, you would never know that the place has fallen on
  3727. hard times from the attitudes of its inhabitants. The Razides that train
  3728. them are zealous in their duties, and the recruits are eager to serve their
  3729. masters in war.
  3730.  
  3731. The most significant fact for the Harrower today is that there are a great
  3732. many gates linking The Marshaling Fields with other parts of Inferno and
  3733. our world. Each of the ten legions in Elysium maintains a Gate or portal
  3734. that links directly with the Marshaling Fields, allowing them to easily get
  3735. new recruits, or shift troops from one location to another without having
  3736. to move through the space of Elysium. There are also Gates linking the
  3737. Marshaling Fields with both Astaroth's and Hareb-Serap citadels. Of course,
  3738. all of these Gates are heavily guarded and require the proper passwords and
  3739. spells to activate. Still, the informed traveler should be aware of them,
  3740. and willing to try and use them if worse comes to worse.
  3741.  
  3742.  
  3743. The Dark Citadels
  3744.  
  3745. I mentioned before that the Dark Citadels of the Death Angels pierce down
  3746. through all nine levels of The Pit. Additionally, they can be found in the
  3747. Wild Zones, each taking on its own manifestation. Out in the Wild Zones
  3748. their appearance is somewhat more personalized to the individual Lord of
  3749. Hell. These Citadels are in fact directly linked to the Citadels within the
  3750. Pit. In fact, once one ventures inside there is no difference at all. The
  3751. facades may be in different locations within Inferno, but the insides are
  3752. all the same. So, theoretically, one could enter Samael's citadel in the
  3753. Fifth Circle, and come out from his citadel gate in the Wild Zones. Razides
  3754. and the Death Angels themselves commonly do just that. The human traveler
  3755. may have a little more difficulty accomplishing such a passage.
  3756.  
  3757. The Citadels, like everything in the Wild Zones are in no fixed place in
  3758. relation to one another. It is unlikely that you will see one actually
  3759. moving across the land, but it is not unheard of. When Death Angels become
  3760. embroiled in fights with one another (as is common these days) it is not
  3761. uncommon to see to warring Citadels adjacent to one another, fighting as if
  3762. they were sixteenth century ships of the line. They will even circle about,
  3763. maneuvering for position. It is said that it was in just such a battle that
  3764. Togarini's Citadel was destroyed and the Death Angel himself forced into
  3765. Elysium in the body of a human conjurer.
  3766.  
  3767. Today the Citadels stand mostly empty, since most of their lords have
  3768. followed Astaroth into our world or have invaded Metropolis itself. This
  3769. makes entrance into the citadels sometimes surprisingly easy. Even though
  3770. the Citadels themselves are extensions of their Lords' will, the Death
  3771. Angels have come to care little for their homes. They look to new conquests
  3772. in the True Reality and over humanity itself. Because citadels often have
  3773. many gates and portals into our world, they are useful destinations for
  3774. harrowers, offering a quick escape if you catch a Death Angel on an off
  3775. day. If however he happens to be in Inferno at the time, well you are in
  3776. trouble. When a Death Angel is present in Inferno, at its citadel it knows
  3777. all that transpires within. The walls and rooms are merely an extension of
  3778. the thing itself. It is best to ascertain if the master is home or not
  3779. before you come knocking.
  3780.  
  3781.  
  3782. The Labyrinth
  3783.  
  3784. The Wild Zones extend as far underground as they do above, and the
  3785. Labyrinth connects all of it together. The same Labyrinth runs between our
  3786. world, Metropolis, and the various parts of Inferno. If one can master the
  3787. intricacies of traveling through the most confusing maze in existence, one
  3788. can travel freely throughout the various realms. Some say that there are
  3789. even passages that connect with Limbo, the realm of dreams, but no one has
  3790. ever proven this to my satisfaction. Of course only those born to its
  3791. twisting passages can ever begin to fully understand it, and certainly no
  3792. one born of Earth will ever know its secrets with any certainty.
  3793.  
  3794. The Labyrinth within the Wild Zones is no safer than the surface world, and
  3795. is just as unpredictable. Passages are liable to close up or change behind
  3796. you, and there is no sure way to map your passage. Of course a compass is
  3797. entirely useless, as are any other location finding devices. The Labyrinth
  3798. is however home to some of the more interesting denizens of Inferno. Of
  3799. course Razides are common down there, but not as common as one might think.
  3800. The tunnels, ducts, and passageways are so extensive that one can almost
  3801. always find a place to hide. While a Razide may never get lost down below,
  3802. it is not necessarily able to find anything either, at least not without
  3803. the aid of powerful magics.
  3804.  
  3805. The myriad of underground hiding places in the Labyrinth offer one of the
  3806. only places of refuge for human souls who have managed to escape their
  3807. tormentors, as well as people who have mistakenly wandered into Inferno
  3808. through temporary portals. While there are not a great number of these free
  3809. floating humans, there are enough to make them worth mentioning. They tend
  3810. to be very nomadic, wandering the less traveled passages of the Labyrinth,
  3811. hunting and killing whatever they can to survive. Many have been here for a
  3812. very, very long time, often hundreds of years. This is a torture almost as
  3813. dehumanizing as some of the tortures of the Nine Circles, and many of them
  3814. have become feral. Should you, as an inquisitive Harrower, manage to come
  3815. across such a band you should be very calm and make no sudden movements.
  3816. They may have long lost their communication skills, but in some cases it is
  3817. possible to reason with them. Offering them gifts is a decidedly bad idea.
  3818. They will naturally assume you to be demons until you prove otherwise, and
  3819. everyone knows what a bad idea it is to take gifts from Razides.
  3820.  
  3821. What unites all of these escapees, and what the Harrower may be able to
  3822. capitalize on, is their hatred for all things Infernal. Given half an
  3823. opportunity to somehow inconvenience the Lords of Hell, they will jump at
  3824. the chance. They despise the forces that have imprisoned them here. Even
  3825. more alluring is the promise of escape from Inferno's clutches. Most of
  3826. them will do anything to escape from the clutches of Astaroth and his
  3827. minions, and will be more than willing to help you in your schemes. The
  3828. help they have to offer can prove invaluable. They know some of the secrets
  3829. of the Labyrinth, and have become very adept at avoiding the Razides and other
  3830. Infernals who prowl the underground byways.
  3831.  
  3832. It is extremely unlikely that you will come across such groups anywhere
  3833. outside of the Labyrinth. Anywhere else in the Wild Zones, and a
  3834. defenseless human is liable to be spotted and attacked or captured within a
  3835. matter of hours. The surface belongs to The Death Angels and their servants
  3836. and citadels. Down below, it is every man, woman, and Razide for itself.
  3837.  
  3838.  
  3839. The Archives
  3840.  
  3841. Even Hell has its bureaucrats. In fact, it probably keeps better records
  3842. than most banks. After all, labor is effectively free in Inferno,
  3843. especially for tasks set by Astaroth. When he formed Inferno, The Prince of
  3844. Darkness thought it important to keep accurate records of every soul that
  3845. passed through Inferno, and all the Circles and other torments it passed
  3846. through. He created a whole race of Infernal record keepers for just this
  3847. purpose: The so-called lexiths or book imps. These lesser Infernals come in
  3848. a variety of shapes and sizes, from scribes of diminutive stature to large
  3849. hulking brutes who tend the stacks. They constantly seem to be underfoot
  3850. everywhere in Inferno, taking down the comings and goings of as many of
  3851. Hell's visitors as possible.
  3852.  
  3853. Other Razides find the lexiths to be insufferably annoying, and are in the
  3854. habit of eating them rather than answering their questions. Of course then
  3855. the nasty little librarians will simply claw their way out of the offending
  3856. Razide's stomach. Nevertheless, I have been told that the pleasure of
  3857. making a lexith quiet down for a short while is worth the pain of its
  3858. escape. They keep all their records on long scrolls, said to be made from
  3859. human skin. In fact they are massed produced in the Archives from the very
  3860. stuff of Inferno, but the lexiths try their best to act as fearsome as
  3861. their more sinister brethren. The records are all kept in Infernal script,
  3862. a language all its own, although not impossible for a human to learn. If
  3863. you come across a lexicon (an admittedly rare find) it is worth studying.
  3864.  
  3865. The Archives themselves are a massive building located in The Wild Zones.
  3866. The black marble edifice reaches up into the sky almost a mile, a solid
  3867. black monolith dominating the surrounding Infernal landscape. There are no
  3868. windows, but intricate carvings cover the entire surface, showing the
  3869. history of Astaroth's foundation of Inferno. The building extends
  3870. underground at least as far as it soars above. Inside the building are
  3871. hundreds of floors of scriptoriums and shelves overstuffed with records
  3872. scrolls. In the old days it was possible to find the history of any soul in
  3873. human history that had been through Inferno. Even today there are parts of
  3874. the Archives that still contain such information, facts that can be very
  3875. useful when trying to find some soul's whereabouts in Inferno at any given
  3876. time.
  3877.  
  3878. However, since the Demiurge disappeared and Astaroth came into our world,
  3879. the Archives have slipped into a rather chaotic regime. Without the
  3880. guidance of their creator, the lexiths have strayed from their original
  3881. path. They have now taken to recording not only the comings and goings of
  3882. human souls, but anything else they happen to find out about as well. In
  3883. fact, given the declining number of human souls, and the increasing ease
  3884. with which lexiths are becoming distracted by other matters, there are very
  3885. few records of humans being written at all these days. One can find reams
  3886. and reams of scrolls devoted to the eating habits of a particular Razide
  3887. over a thirteen year period. Some are interesting, like an interesting list
  3888. of all the tortures performed in The First Circle in a one hour period
  3889. (Archive time). When looking for information, the Archives are quite
  3890. inconsistent.
  3891.  
  3892. Of course gaining access to the Archives is not as easy as one my think.
  3893. The doors do not lock, and anyone can simply walk in whenever they please.
  3894. However, although the lexiths are by birth bookish, humble creatures, they
  3895. would love to be something more. They look up with awe and envy at the
  3896. other Razides, jealous of their power over human souls. A lone, unprepared
  3897. human wandering into the Archives is liable to be attacked by every lexith
  3898. who sees him. All of them will be eager to try and emulate the marvels they
  3899. have seen their idols perform. Alone a lexith is not much of a threat, but
  3900. they can be very dangerous when large groups get together.
  3901.  
  3902. The intrepid researcher can find a tremendous amount of useful information
  3903. here, as long as he knows how to look. I find that a few spells from the
  3904. Lore of Time and Space are of inestimable value when researching here, and
  3905. if you have access to such magiks or know someone who does, be sure to
  3906. bring them along. I myself have made use of the Archives on more than one
  3907. occasion in assembling this book.
  3908.  
  3909.  
  3910. The Hatching Chambers
  3911.  
  3912. One of the more famous features of the Wild Zones, The Hatching Chambers
  3913. are located entirely underneath the surface. They consist of a vast network
  3914. of caverns and tunnels that connect directly with the Labyrinth and the
  3915. Nine Circles. Only someone who wanted to spend the rest of eternity in the
  3916. pits of Inferno would dare to visit such a place, for it is where Razides
  3917. are born. The original Razides, muck like Athena, where born out of
  3918. Astaroth's head. He created them from nothing to be the perfect servants to
  3919. him and his cause. Of course creating from scratch is a tiring process,
  3920. even for a powerful being such as Astaroth. But he did not want them to be
  3921. able to procreate on their own. He knew that as long as he controlled their
  3922. numbers he could keep them under his sway. Thus the Hatching Chambers came
  3923. to be.
  3924.  
  3925. The Chambers resemble an ant hill or bee hive; they are full of anxious
  3926. Razides running about, tending to the needs of the new born. Each of the
  3927. great Birthing Chambers contains what some call the "queen", the Infernal
  3928. device responsible for laying the eggs that eventually mature into the
  3929. various types of Razides. It is not a queen at all, but a machine that The
  3930. Lord of Hell created to give birth to its creations. The machines operate
  3931. under mechanical laws unimaginable to us, combining the raw energy of
  3932. Inferno with the hatred and energy taken directly from The Prince of
  3933. Darkness himself. In fact, the machines are all connected to Astaroth's
  3934. Citadel in The Pit, and it is from there that they draw their power.
  3935.  
  3936. Each machine usually specializes in producing Razides designed for specific
  3937. tasks. For example, there are a number of Chambers dedicated to producing
  3938. Razides specially suited for each of the Nine Circles. Others create
  3939. Razides tailored for leading the Legions, guarding the citadels, or even
  3940. corrupting humans in Elysium. From the moment they hatch from their
  3941. leathery eggs, their minds contain all the knowledge necessary to perform
  3942. their assigned tasks. This is not to say this is not to say that they
  3943. cannot learn more. They are usually quite intelligent, and have long
  3944. memories. Many become potent conjurers in their own rights, and have their
  3945. own ambitions to greatness.
  3946.  
  3947. It is for those with too much ambition that the second function of the
  3948. birthing Machines exists. While the Hatching Chambers are the birth place
  3949. of all Razides, it is also where they go to die. The Machines are the only
  3950. devices in Inferno known to be able to totally destroy a Razide (aside of
  3951. course from Astaroth and his Death Angels). This is the ultimate punishment
  3952. for those who disobey the lords of hell, and is the only thing that Razides
  3953. truly fear. To the side of each machine there is usually a pool or vat of
  3954. foul smelling, boiling liquid, said to be the raw materials for Razides.
  3955. Contact with even a small amount of the liquid causes a Razide (and human)
  3956. intense pain, while emerging a demon in the stuff will break it down
  3957. completely. It is an astonishingly simple process, a fact which makes it
  3958. all the more fearful for the Razides who have to work around it.
  3959.  
  3960. I have spoken of the Hatching Chambers in very general terms thus far,
  3961. mostly because there is little information available about them. No human I
  3962. know of has ever visited the place, and most of the Information here is
  3963. either taken from the Archives or from legend. I have no idea how many
  3964. different machines operate within The Chambers, but it numbers well over a
  3965. hundred. Nor do I know at what rate the machines produce Razides or how
  3966. many are terminated on a regular basis. The result of all this uncertainty
  3967. is that I cannot make any kind of accurate guess at the number of these
  3968. demon spawn residing in Inferno at any one time. Forced to guess, I would
  3969. put the number at something close to thirteen billion, give or take a few.
  3970. Remember it is not uncommon for as many as a thousand different Razides to
  3971. have a hand in torturing a single human soul as it passes through the
  3972. Circles, especially in areas where their presence is not so obvious, such
  3973. as the Fifth Circle, where many Razides disguise themselves as humans for
  3974. the purpose of mental abuse.
  3975.  
  3976. My final recommendation is that the wary traveler not make the journey to
  3977. the Hatching Chambers. The risks are too great, and there is only one
  3978. possible reward. It is much easier for a conjurer to bind a new born Razide
  3979. than one of its more experienced cousins. So occasionally a brave conjurer
  3980. might try and pick out a new born from the Hatching Chambers, one who meets
  3981. his or her very specific needs. Certainly this is the best place to look
  3982. when searching for a special kind of Razide, for all the varieties are
  3983. usually present. That of course is also the largest caveat: all the
  3984. varieties are present, and you can not bind them all.
  3985.  
  3986.  
  3987. The Freeholds
  3988.  
  3989. Freeholds is somewhat of a misnomer, for they are not specific regions
  3990. within the Wild Zones so much as specific groups who exist in Inferno. The
  3991. Freeholds are rouge groups of Razides who have broken free from their lords
  3992. and are trying to make it on their own in Inferno. Sometimes these are just
  3993. bands of wild demons who have lost their minds, and now wander the
  3994. landscape of hell like rabid dogs. More interesting are the organized
  3995. resistance groups, many of which dedicate themselves to overthrowing the
  3996. rule of Astaroth and his Death Angels. In former times such a rebellion
  3997. would be impossible. Astaroth's will in Inferno was absolute. Today there
  3998. is hope for these demonic revolutionaries, although not much.
  3999.  
  4000. They tend to be nomads, wandering throughout the Wild Zones and the
  4001. Labyrinth, searching for new recruits. Since they are Infernals by birth,
  4002. they have no trouble moving about the hellish terrain, allowing them to
  4003. hide from their enemies rather effectively. The more powerful demon lords
  4004. who have remained loyal to Astaroth have found that it is almost impossible
  4005. to find a Razide who does not want to be found in Inferno. Only the Death
  4006. Angels and the Dark Lord himself have the power necessary to hunt these
  4007. seditious bands out, and they are too busy with their own affairs to care.
  4008. The result is that many of the rebels are able to move about with impunity,
  4009. raiding The Circles for human slaves and new recruits.
  4010.  
  4011. Why rebel against hell? Unfortunately, it is not for noble or idealistic
  4012. reasons. Such thoughts are anathema to the Razide. It is, naturally enough,
  4013. simply a matter of jealousy. These are the Razides who were the lowest of
  4014. the low, who never got their fair share of humans to torment and torture.
  4015. Some resent the powers and pleasures available to the Lords of the Circles,
  4016. while they are stuck with some menial Infernal task. Lexiths flock to these
  4017. bands in great numbers, hoping for a chance to raise their standing in the
  4018. world of the damned. The consequence of this greed is that none of the
  4019. various rebel groups are willing to work together. Trust is an alien
  4020. sentiment down below, especially among demons. Everyone knows you cannot
  4021. take a Razide at its word, and Razides know it better than most.
  4022.  
  4023. Of course not all the groups exist as nomads. There are in fact a few
  4024. established strongholds deep within the Wild Zones. These pale in
  4025. comparison to the Citadels of the Death Angels, but are fearsome places all
  4026. the same. While it may be nice to have a home one can depend on, it is
  4027. actually quite dangerous to create such fortifications. even in the ever
  4028. shifting geography of Inferno, a set structure is something that can be
  4029. found and destroyed. More than one such stronghold has been leveled when
  4030. the moving Citadel of a Death Angel simply moves over it, crushing the
  4031. structure and all its occupants, who are then captured and sent to
  4032. the Hatching Chambers to be broken down. Nevertheless, rouge Razides keep
  4033. building the structures, seemingly in some vain attempt to imitate their
  4034. masters.
  4035.  
  4036. The Harrower may find that these rouge groups offer some assistance in a
  4037. time of need, but caution is always prudent in such matters. Many Razides
  4038. are willing to ally themselves with humans in order to accomplish their own
  4039. goals, especially if a powerful conjurer offers his or her services. Just
  4040. remember, the Razide's goals usually encompass enslaving and torturing
  4041. humans, and they will do anything to meet their goals.
  4042.  
  4043.  
  4044. Part Three:
  4045.  
  4046. Lords of Hell
  4047.  
  4048. I have spent the majority of this work detailing some of the intricacies of
  4049. Inferno's complicated geography. I come now to a discussion of some of the
  4050. realm's more notable figures; namely, Astaroth and the Death Angels. Much
  4051. has been said of these Infernal potentates in other volumes, and to a
  4052. certain extant the subject is beyond my purview. Today these beings are so
  4053. involved in the world of the living, that Inferno is but a distant memory
  4054. to them. Nevertheless, it remains the base of their power, and most of them
  4055. still call it home, even if they do not reside there any more.
  4056.  
  4057. Here I shall examine not so much their motives as their physical
  4058. manifestation in Inferno itself. I mean of course their respective Dark
  4059. Citadels, places that I have hinted at throughout the volume up to the
  4060. present chapter. I discussed them somewhat in the section devoted to The
  4061. Wild Zones, and somewhat less in my description of The Pit. There I
  4062. discussed them as part and parcel of the land they occupied. Here I turn to
  4063. the individual character of the vast fortresses, for each one reflects the
  4064. will ad desire of its master.
  4065.  
  4066. First a few more general comments. The Citadels themselves exist in several
  4067. places within Inferno at once. We have already seen this phenomenon in the
  4068. duplication of Citadels between The Pit and The Wild Zones. Once one
  4069. inside, it makes no difference where you entered, every part of the Citadel
  4070. is accessible, at least in theory. It is even possible for several versions
  4071. of a Citadel to exist in different place in different parts of The Wild
  4072. Zones at the same time. In the limitless space of the outer reaches of
  4073. Inferno, this is often a necessity for the Death Angels in their feuds with
  4074. one another.
  4075.  
  4076. Astaroth's Citadel is somewhat different from the others. While the Death
  4077. Angels may reign supreme within their own keeps, Astaroth reigns over all
  4078. of Inferno. In effect, the entirety of Inferno is the Prince of Darkness'
  4079. Citadel, and it is merely an extension of his will. The great spire
  4080. sprouting up from the depths of The Pit is merely a symbol of Astaroth's
  4081. power, more like a throne from which he surveys his kingdom spread out in
  4082. all its glory before him. When Astaroth was content to sit on that throne,
  4083. he ruled Inferno with an iron fist. Since he left, his kingdom has begun to
  4084. fall apart. The throne sits abandoned, the tower's door locked against the
  4085. kingdom.
  4086.  
  4087. The Death Angels have begun to take more and more of Inferno for their own.
  4088. Some do so in the name of loyalty, claiming that they are merely protecting
  4089. Astaroth's interests, while in reality they seek nothing but their own
  4090. aggrandizement. Others are more open in their revolt, taking what they can
  4091. get now, and hoping that they will be powerful enough to hold on to it
  4092. later. As the Death Angels go, so do the Razides, who have been making
  4093. their own plays for power in hell, although generally with less hope of
  4094. lasting success than their betters.
  4095.  
  4096.  
  4097. Selling Your Soul
  4098.  
  4099. Human souls are the most important commodity in Inferno, particularly among
  4100. the demons who exist only to torture them. Thus there are Pit Wars where
  4101. demons fight for the right to torture the damned. Why, one might ask, do
  4102. The Death Angels seldom if ever become involved in these petty squabbles?
  4103. Surely they have the power to take what souls they want from the hands of
  4104. the minor demon lords of The Circles. Of course they could, they just do
  4105. not care to do so. The torture of souls who sinned and whose memories must
  4106. be scoured is of little interest to the Death Angels, and even less so for
  4107. Astaroth. This is the nominal purpose for Inferno, and is a task best left
  4108. to lesser beings. The Lords of Hell and its King have their sights set much
  4109. higher. They all, with one exception, desire power for themselves, usually
  4110. at the expense of each other.
  4111.  
  4112. What is true power for a Lord of Hell? Power lets them enforce their will
  4113. on others. Power is controlling the fate of the world. Power is being
  4114. worshipped and revered by lesser beings. Power is crushing your enemies. To
  4115. have power one must have the necessary tools with which to do battle:
  4116. armies, magic, servants, machines of war, and so on. One of the most
  4117. powerful tools available is the human soul. The incredibly resilient human
  4118. forms the backbone of the Legions of the Damned, and the private armies of
  4119. many Death Angels as well. Why then do Astaroth and the Death Angels not
  4120. participate in the Pit Wars? Because they are not interested in finding
  4121. temporary playthings for torture. They seek able bodied, eager servants,
  4122. those who will be loyal to the cause. They seek those who will sell their
  4123. souls willingly.
  4124.  
  4125. Selling one's soul is a risky proposition at best. The Death Angels and
  4126. Astaroth are all eager to make such deals with foolish humans, and will
  4127. offer seemingly wonderful concessions: magic, money, power, women, whatever
  4128. you want. Such paltry gifts are easy for them to bestow, and in return they
  4129. get a god as a servant for eternity. Once someone sells their soul the
  4130. contract is final. They will go to Inferno when they die, no question about
  4131. it. But they will not begin the process of filtering down though The Pit.
  4132. Instead they will pass directly into the Citadel of their new master, be it
  4133. Astaroth or one of the Death Angels.
  4134.  
  4135. Almost universally all the souls one finds in a Citadel are those who sold
  4136. themselves. This happens much more often than one might expect. Most cults,
  4137. Satanists, and devil worshipers end up selling their soul at some point. In
  4138. fact, many cultists simply give it away, asking nothing in return. It is
  4139. blind devotion on their part, coupled with stupidity, that makes them think
  4140. that once they have given up their soul, Astaroth will be so grateful that
  4141. he will continue to protect them. Quite the contrary, The Prince of
  4142. Darkness now eagerly awaits their death so that he might take custody of
  4143. his new prize. Thousands of young people have willingly given themselves
  4144. over in thoughtless rebellion against their parents' ideas, not realizing
  4145. that they would be paying the price of rebellion for eternity.
  4146.  
  4147. Entering into a contract requires very little formality. It can, and
  4148. usually is, a strictly verbal agreement. It can be as simple as "O Satan!
  4149. If I pass this test, you can have my soul forever!" He, or one of the Death
  4150. Angels may well be listening to your plea, and if they act to ensure that
  4151. your request comes true, your soul is theirs. since the beginning of our
  4152. imprisonment the Lords of Hell have been out there, actively seeking
  4153. converts among humanity. Sometimes they will strike traditional deals,
  4154. bartering power of some sort for an individual's soul. However, most of
  4155. these deals are originated by would be conjurers who seek short cuts on the
  4156. road to knowledge. The Infernals prefer to offer much less, taking joy in
  4157. tricking men out of their souls. They will approach the downtrodden and the
  4158. sinners, people who are in some kind of trouble. At your moment of greatest
  4159. need they will come to you and offer aid, asking only your soul in return.
  4160. Most people do not take the offer seriously. In fact many do not believe
  4161. that they have a soul, and so are more than willing to sell it.
  4162.  
  4163. Once they have the soul, it may take some time to acclimate it for its new
  4164. duties. The process takes place within the Dark Citadel of the soul's new
  4165. master, and many times resembles the tortures of The Circles, except that
  4166. the goal is different. Instead of beating the soul into a mindless state,
  4167. they are merely beating into submission. Most souls never leave their new
  4168. home, remaining servants to the Death Angels for the rest of time. The
  4169. Razides and other demons who serve the lords are ceaselessly cruel to the
  4170. humans, who they view as lower than themselves in every respect. The poor
  4171. fools who sold their souls live out an eternity of pain and suffering,
  4172. almost without exception.
  4173.  
  4174. The exception is the reason for the whole rigmarole. Where is the power in
  4175. having human slaves? Where is the power in endless torture? The goal of
  4176. this torture, the secret unwritten, unspoken goal of all the suffering is
  4177. the awakening of humans. This may seem incredible, but it is true. We know
  4178. that there is a dark path and a light path to The Awakening, and that
  4179. ritual pain and suffering can bring enlightenment. Only one in a million
  4180. will awaken from such techniques, particularly when they are applied by an
  4181. outsider, but the one in a million is worth all the trouble. There are few
  4182. forces in the universe more potent than an awakened god, and now that force
  4183. is the sole property of the Lord of Hell who bought the soul originally.
  4184.  
  4185. Astaroth and his Death Angels seek to use our power against us, to harness
  4186. the energies of our divinity for their own purposes. To what extent they
  4187. have succeeded I cannot say. It is entirely possible that they have not
  4188. succeeded at all, or that they have succeeded but then lost their hold over
  4189. the newly awakened gods. Others say that there have been some very great
  4190. successes, and that it is a small force of awakened humans under Thaumiel's
  4191. command that protects him from Astaroth's vengeance. Others say that
  4192. Astaroth himself has raised an Awakened One for many years, grooming him to
  4193. take the Prince of Darkness' place in Inferno while he pursues his
  4194. interests in Elysium and Metropolis.
  4195.  
  4196. The value of human souls to the Infernal Lords cannot be doubted, and now
  4197. you see why they try to fill their citadels with them. Each, in its own way
  4198. seeks a way to unlock the key to human divinity, so that they can create a
  4199. whole race of enslaved gods, yoked to their own hellish schemes. So I turn
  4200. now to those individual lords and their citadels offering what insights I
  4201. have gleaned into their workings. As you read, keep ever in mind the true
  4202. purpose of these vast fortresses, for some day your soul may depend on that
  4203. knowledge.
  4204.  
  4205.  
  4206. The Dark Citadel
  4207.  
  4208. Whenever anything speaks of The Dark Citadel in Inferno, they inevitably
  4209. are referring to the thousand mile high spire of Astaroth's enthronement,
  4210. soaring from the unknown depths of The Pit. It is first among citadels, and
  4211. was once home to the greatest concentration of souls in all Inferno.
  4212. Certainly Astaroth, in all his many incarnations around the world, has
  4213. managed to acquire several times as many souls as all of his Death Angels
  4214. put together. If anyone could find a way to enslave the power of human
  4215. divinity, it would be the Prince of Darkness himself.
  4216.  
  4217. At the height of his power, Astaroth's Citadel was the center of all goings
  4218. on in Inferno. In the Dark Spire alone there were over a billion Razides
  4219. employed, and millions of human souls held in eternal pain and torment. The
  4220. Dark Spire encompassed every form of torture known to Inferno, and the
  4221. Razides there did it better than any other demons in hell. Here he taught
  4222. the most powerful death magics to his human worshipers and servants,
  4223. sending them back into Elysium to make more converts to his Satanic cause.
  4224.  
  4225. Now the Dark Spire stands virtually empty, its black gates closed to all
  4226. who would gain entry. No one has managed to gain entrance to the Citadel
  4227. since Astaroth left in search of the Demiurge. Occasionally one spies a
  4228. lone figure moving about in a window, or a winged beast circling the spire
  4229. for a short while, but these are the only signs of activity within. Several
  4230. years ago Thaumiel launched an assault on the citadel, but could not
  4231. penetrate its walls by any means. It was worse than being defeated in. The
  4232. rebellious Death Angel looked to be impotent before the entire
  4233. Infernal host of The Pit. So impotent that the Prince of Darkness did not
  4234. even have to mount a defense against him. Of course, he is not so impotent
  4235. that Astaroth is able to put down his rebellion either.
  4236.  
  4237. Most of the souls that Astaroth kept in his citadel have been forced into
  4238. service in the Legions. Many have already made the journey over to Elysium,
  4239. while the rest are training at the Marshaling Fields. The hosts of demons
  4240. who served The Dark Lord are nowhere to be seen. Certainly a few of them
  4241. are involved with the Legions, but not a billion of them. No one knows what
  4242. became of these unfortunate Razides, although some surmise that Astaroth
  4243. sacrificed the lot of them in order to gain the power to open up all the
  4244. gates necessary to bring his armies through into Elysium.
  4245.  
  4246. What is certain is that there is no unlocking the mystery of the Dark
  4247. Spire. Even the gates and portals that once connected the citadel with
  4248. other parts of Inferno, Elysium, and Metropolis have been sealed shut.
  4249. Still, The Dark Spire stands as a symbol of Astaroth's immutable authority.
  4250. It towers above all the other citadels, daring them to make a futile
  4251. assault on its impregnable walls. Since the fall of Togarini, and
  4252. Thaumiel's failure, none have yet summoned up the courage to try.
  4253.  
  4254. If the rumors about Astaroth grooming an awakened human to watch over
  4255. Inferno are true, then the whole dynamic of Infernal politics could change
  4256. in an instant. Assuming that this corrupted human had enough power to hold
  4257. on to the Throne of Hell, he could easily bring order back to the chaotic
  4258. realm. However, the Lords of Hell may greatly resent a human, no matter how
  4259. divine, lording it over them. Installing such a regent might just be enough
  4260. to force the Death Angels to put aside their petty squabbles and join
  4261. together to overthrow their former master. Of course if the divine human is
  4262. half as powerful as his lord, then it will be no contest.
  4263.  
  4264.  
  4265. Thaumiel's Citadel
  4266.  
  4267. First among his kinds, Thaumiel now stands as the most rebellious of
  4268. Astaroth's former servants. He stands in open conflict with both his lord
  4269. and his cousins. His Citadel is an armed camp, with every entrance guarded
  4270. by diabolic machines of war, manned by fiercely loyal demonic soldiers.
  4271. Only those who come to serve Thaumiel or become his slave can pass through
  4272. these gates unchallenged. All other are cut down on sight. As a result,
  4273. there is usually a wide zone around Thaumiel's citadel in each of the Nine
  4274. Circles. No one wants to be mistaken for an attacker. This is easy to do,
  4275. since the Citadel is almost constantly under attack on some front, either
  4276. by other Death Angels, powerful Razides, or servants of Astaroth himself.
  4277.  
  4278. In the Wild Zones, Thaumiel's was one of the first to pioneer the moving
  4279. Citadel. The citadel appears in the form of a tremendous floating fortress,
  4280. hovering hundred yards above the ground. It is a maze of medieval looking
  4281. battlements, towers, and turrets, with demonic guards stationed all about
  4282. it. It roves through the Wild Zones, sometimes moving at supersonic speeds.
  4283. This makes it very hard for Thaumiel's enemies to launch an effective
  4284. attack on his citadel, and allows him to use it as a mobile base of
  4285. operations. He has been quite effective in using the floating citadel to
  4286. force lesser demon lords into submission.
  4287.  
  4288. Inside the Citadel is a tremendous armed camp, with a complex hierarchy of
  4289. ranks and titles. Thaumiel is obsessive about station and place in society,
  4290. and this is reflected in everything about the Citadel. The infernal lord's
  4291. caste system is made up of 1,237 different classes, each with very clear
  4292. privileges and restrictions. A demon's caste determines its duties, what
  4293. levels of the Citadel it has access to, who is under its command, and even
  4294. what kind of weapons it is allowed to use in warfare. Movement through the
  4295. ranks is accomplished entirely by proving one's merit, and in these times
  4296. of troubles the only way to prove one's merit is through combat. There is
  4297. constant fighting among the castes, although never outright war. Rather,
  4298. constant duels, assassinations, and other attacks rage up and down the
  4299. Citadel.
  4300.  
  4301. Thaumiel encourages conflict and ambition among his followers, as long as
  4302. it does not interfere with his own plans. The only truly unforgivable sin
  4303. for The Unjust Ruler is compromising the war effort. So, while they may
  4304. fight among themselves at home, Thaumiel's legions work together
  4305. brilliantly on the field of battle. This unity is one of the main reasons
  4306. Thaumiel has been as successful as he has in standing up against Astaroth,
  4307. Golab, and Hareb-Serap. It also helps that Astaroth has not turned his full
  4308. attention to the rebellious Death Angel.
  4309.  
  4310. Humans are of course the lowest caste in Thaumiel's citadel. They are
  4311. servants, playthings and victims. Thaumiel is most interested in those
  4312. souls with a bent towards domination and power. These he subjects to every
  4313. imaginable torture in an attempt to awaken their divinity. Most however he
  4314. consigns to the depths of the Citadel for his demons to play with. There
  4315. they are either transformed into adequate servants, or suffer through an
  4316. eternity of sorrow and agony at the cruel hands of Thaumiel's Razides.
  4317.  
  4318. It is close to impossible for a human to travel through the chambers of the
  4319. citadel without being accosted. In a society where everyone has his place,
  4320. those who re out of theirs are easily noticed. Even powerful conjurers
  4321. working with Thaumiel do not move about the citadel without guides of some
  4322. sort to protect them. Of all the travel destinations for a would be
  4323. Harrower of hell, this is one of the least accommodating in an already
  4324. unfriendly climate. Humans within the Citadel tend to succumb quickly to
  4325. the mindset of the place. The citadel is after all an extension of the
  4326. Death Angel himself, and his mind is so overpowering that it cannot but
  4327. effect the human psyche. Adversely. Humans begin to get caught up in the
  4328. caste system, believing that they are in fact the lowest of the low, and
  4329. deserving of whatever punishments they receive. Those rare individuals who
  4330. resist such feelings tend to be prime candidates for a forced awakening
  4331.  
  4332.  
  4333. Chagdiel's Citadel
  4334.  
  4335. Chagdiel is perhaps Thaumiel's greatest ally, although Thaumiel himself
  4336. seems to care little for the lesser Death Angel. Chagdiel's obsession with
  4337. children seems profoundly impractical to Thaumiel. He does however admire
  4338. the childish selfishness for power that the Bloodstained Patriarch
  4339. displays, especially now that it has turned against Astaroth as well.
  4340. Chagdiel delights in the ease with which children are frightened, yet
  4341. marvels at how surprisingly resilient they can be. The citadel is therefore
  4342. filled with children, and Chagdiel himself specializes in collecting the
  4343. souls of children. It is not hard at all to corrupt a young human,
  4344. particularly if they have never been brought up to believe in the existence
  4345. of the soul. Even those souls of Chagdiel's who are not children when they
  4346. die will revert to a childlike state upon entering his citadel. As an
  4347. extension of his will, that is an immutable law. Chagdiel and his Razides
  4348. are the only "adults" in the citadel, and they are stern, abusive authority
  4349. figures who strike fear into the heart of all young ones.
  4350.  
  4351. The interior of the citadel is a kind of daycare center gone mad. Room
  4352. after room of holding cells, demonic classrooms, and perverted play areas
  4353. make up the vast majority of the Citadel's interior. The children are not
  4354. simply kept as prisoners, but are rather made to go through a horrifying
  4355. mockery of normal childhood. Teachers give them interminable lessons that
  4356. are impossible to understand. Failing to pay attention, or sit up straight,
  4357. or answer a question correctly results in immediate, and forceful corporal
  4358. punishment. Everything from being paddled ten thousand times, to being
  4359. flayed alive. They sleep in huge dormitory settings with a thousand
  4360. children to a room. No privacy is permitted, no whispering, or talking.
  4361. Razides prowl through the rows of beds, each of which is merely an iron
  4362. pallet kept either too hot or too cold for comfort. Part of Chagdiel's
  4363. paradigm prevents the children from feeling tired, thus they constantly
  4364. want to squirm about and get more comfortable, to try some how and get some
  4365. sleep. The Razide monitors invariably view such attempts as disobedience
  4366. and punish it accordingly.
  4367.  
  4368. The children are of course allowed time to play. Chagdiel is a firm
  4369. believer that children should have time among themselves to have fun and be
  4370. creative. Of course, their playthings are the stuff of torture chambers and
  4371. charnel houses. They are given the sharpest knives and real guns with which
  4372. to play war. They climb on insanely intricate climbing apparati, studded
  4373. with spikes, razor wire, and other traps. Pools of blood, bubbling
  4374. cauldrons of bile, rotting corpses, fields of man eating plants: these are
  4375. the playthings of Chagdiel's children. Recess is a constant nightmare, a
  4376. fight to survive. But of course no one really dies in Inferno, they just
  4377. live to suffer another day.
  4378.  
  4379. Chagdiel keeps a close watch on his children, looking for those who might
  4380. prove themselves possible candidates for awakening. These he treats with
  4381. special care, submitting them to the harshest measures and most harrowing
  4382. torments he can come up with. The result is children who are hard,
  4383. unfeeling, totally ruthless. Since young humans tend to be more
  4384. impressionable than their elders, many of them come to accept Chagdiel as a
  4385. kind of perverted father figure. Some of them come to even love him in a
  4386. very twisted way. thus Chagdiel enjoys a strange luxury among the Death
  4387. Angels: many of his human servant actually serve him out of misguided sense
  4388. of loyalty. Should one of these some day awaken, Chagdiel will have a
  4389. distinct advantage over his foes.
  4390.  
  4391. Humans entering Chagdiel's citadel often undergo an almost immediate
  4392. metamorphosis into a child like state, usually to however they were around
  4393. the age of twelve. There is no known way to avoid this fate, and as you
  4394. might imagine, it can be very inconvenient. Unfortunately, Chagdiel's
  4395. citadel is also a relatively common destination for the more foolhardy
  4396. harrowers. Many Satanists, death conjurers, and dabblers in the occult
  4397. become quite distraught when they find that their children, in emulation of
  4398. their parents, have unwittingly sold their souls to Chagdiel. Driven by
  4399. despair, they launch ill-fated rescue missions which inevitably end in
  4400. failure, the parents reverting to a childlike state themselves and becoming
  4401. eternal slaves to the Death Angel.
  4402.  
  4403.  
  4404. Satherial's Citadel
  4405.  
  4406. The Devastating Mother is ever an unpredictable force in Infernal politics
  4407. and power plays. As a fomenter of chaos, she often does the unexpected, but
  4408. never the unintelligent. She is a cunning, ruthless being, with very clear
  4409. goals: chaos for everyone. While nominally loyal to The Prince of Darkness,
  4410. one can be sure that she would turn on him with pleasure should the
  4411. opportunity present itself. In the current state of conflict between Death
  4412. Angels she is relatively aloof, only entering into the fray on occasion to
  4413. stir things up a bit.
  4414.  
  4415. Her citadel runs now much as it always has, even though fewer and fewer
  4416. humans find their way to her. Unlike some of the others, she has never been
  4417. a great recruiter of human souls. Certainly she has relations with humans,
  4418. offering aid to anarchists, radical political and religious movements, and
  4419. others who might disrupt the order. Many of these end up in her citadel
  4420. when they die, but traveling through the place, you would hardly know it.
  4421. They tens to become lost in the shuffle; just one more strange being
  4422. lurking about in the shadows.
  4423.  
  4424. Satherial expresses her own chaos in her citadel, and all who venture into
  4425. her realm are caught up in it. In many respects her entire citadel
  4426. resembles the Sixth Circle. it is a place where animal instincts rule, and
  4427. no sense of hierarchy or rules exist. The dense complex of tunnels twist
  4428. and turn in upon themselves throughout the length and breadth of the
  4429. citadel, constantly shifting and changing around you. Here all laws of man,
  4430. nature, and even hell are void. Creatures of every imaginable sort wander
  4431. the halls, caught up in the chaos. There are only two things that any of
  4432. the inhabitants care about: food and sex.
  4433.  
  4434. Food can be anything and everything that might provide nourishment. Usually
  4435. it means the other creatures that wander the endless halls. Here of course
  4436. humans are at a distinct disadvantage. The typical human requires tools
  4437. with which to hunt, especially when the prey is bigger, stronger, and
  4438. fatter than he is. In the primeval labyrinth of Satheriel's home, humans
  4439. tend to revert to an animal state, unable to conceive of or use tools of
  4440. any kind. They are left to fight with tooth and claw just like any other
  4441. beast. The result: more often than not they get eaten. Be forewarned: it is
  4442. not just the souls the Sathariel has bought that undergo this
  4443. transformation; it is every human who strays into the citadel, even
  4444. adventurous harrowers.
  4445.  
  4446. Sex is another story entirely. The drive for sex in the citadel has nothing
  4447. to do with pleasure and everything to do with procreation. Sathariel is
  4448. obsessed with creating new and different forms of life, and so in her
  4449. world, any tow beings can mate and produce young. Even human beings are
  4450. free to mate with whatever they choose, and given the state of mind they
  4451. are in, they will usually chooses anything that moves, especially if they
  4452. have already eaten. The offspring of such unions are inevitably bizarre,
  4453. but always viable. It is Sathariel's will that only the best traits go into
  4454. the union. Of course her idea of best traits and ours tend to be radically
  4455. different. For her anything that supports the ability to feed and procreate
  4456. is good, anything else is unimportant, including things like beauty, and
  4457. intelligence. Animal wits are all well and good, but logical thought has no
  4458. place in Sathariel's citadel.
  4459.  
  4460. Anyone traveling through her citadel is likely to encounter scores or even
  4461. hundreds of these creatures, each one eager to wither take a bite out of
  4462. you, or (if you re a little more lucky) mount you and mate. Neither is
  4463. likely to be a pleasant experience. Many of the creatures that stock the
  4464. citadel were originally not from earth. Monstrosities from all over
  4465. Inferno, Metropolis, and even Elysium come together here. Even creatures
  4466. from totally incompatible categories can mate here: insects and mammals,
  4467. humans and fish. Anything is possible, and you can be assured that it has
  4468. all been tried at least once.
  4469.  
  4470. Can this primordial chaos produce an awakened human? I can not say, but it
  4471. certainly does not seem likely. Sathariel opposes all those factors that go
  4472. into awakening out inner divinity. Perhaps she is misguided in her efforts,
  4473. blinded by her own chaotic desires. Perhaps to she simply does not care.
  4474. For her, existence is good. Chaos is coming ever closer to all the worlds;
  4475. her dream becomes reality every day.
  4476.  
  4477.  
  4478. Gamichicoth's Citadel
  4479.  
  4480. Fasting, asceticism, self-denial; these have all long been seen as tools in
  4481. the quest for enlightenment. Theoretically the value of such techniques is
  4482. in denying yourself worldly comforts in an attempt to get more in touch
  4483. with your soul. Whatever the reason, it is not supposed to be a pleasant,
  4484. comfortable experience. Perhaps this is why Gamichicoth has chosen to focus
  4485. his existence on the deprivation of food and drink. Maybe he sees the
  4486. perfection of such techniques as the key to awakening the human souls he
  4487. holds under his power. More likely, he simply takes enormous pleasure in
  4488. the suffering that accompanies dire need. He is after all, an Angel of
  4489. Death.
  4490.  
  4491. Gamichicoth is another minor player in the struggle for authority in
  4492. Inferno. He has no real army, no real following, and far less human souls
  4493. than most of his brethren. Like all of his kind, he chafes under Astaroth's
  4494. rules and restrictions, but he nominally remains loyal to the King of Hell,
  4495. mostly out of fear. He works quietly, but diligently to increase his power,
  4496. careful never to arouse the suspicion of any of the other Death Angels. In
  4497. Inferno, his realm is a quiet one, not engaged in the constant strife that
  4498. has engulfed other regions.
  4499.  
  4500. The citadel itself is a series of barren chambers, closely resembling a
  4501. hospital. The rooms are usually well kept, and are arranged in an orderly
  4502. manner. At least they seem to be arranged in an orderly manner; for
  4503. although one has a sense that there is a plan to the place, it is difficult
  4504. if not impossible to ever get the hang of it. Losing one's way is easy in
  4505. such a place, although in the back of your mind you always have the feeling
  4506. that you will figure it out at any moment.
  4507.  
  4508. The desire to find one's way is heightened by the tremendous hunger and
  4509. thirst that humans feel immediately upon entering the citadel. Of course
  4510. Gamichicoth has made certain that there is no way to satiate these
  4511. feelings, no matter how much one consumes. Mot travelers quickly gobble up
  4512. all they have brought with them in an effort to slake their parched throats
  4513. and appease their ravenous bellies. They spend the rest of their days
  4514. searching for more, wandering the sterile halls and rooms.
  4515.  
  4516. Gamichicoth employs few Razides or other creatures, preferring to let
  4517. hunger and thirst take their toll. Other humans are the only other beings
  4518. one is likely to encounter as you wander the endless corridors. Such
  4519. meetings are rarely pleasant, for your fellow man tends to look more like
  4520. food than like a possible companion. Fights almost invariable ensue upon
  4521. such meetings, as each tries to sink his teeth into the other's emaciated
  4522. flesh. This same tendency often causes groups of humans to turn against
  4523. each other, even if they have been long time friends. Eventually the desire
  4524. for sustenance simply becomes too great, and one ceases to worry about
  4525. little matters such as loyalty, love, and friendship.
  4526.  
  4527. Gamichicoth's human servants are those individuals who in life proved
  4528. themselves capable of great cruelty and deception. Gamichicoth would
  4529. promise to aid such men and women in return for their eternal souls.
  4530. Unfortunately for Gamichicoth, such people are not usually the type that
  4531. will benefit from the meditative benefits of fasting. They are usually much
  4532. too shallow and self centered. However, should a more spiritual person find
  4533. themselves locked up for years or decades in Gamichicoth's citadel, then he
  4534. might actually manage to produce an awakened human. However, since
  4535. Gamichicoth's methods are more passive than most, it is unlikely that he is
  4536. well enough equipped or prepared to actually control a fully divine and
  4537. awake human, should the need arise.
  4538.  
  4539.  
  4540. Golab's Citadel
  4541.  
  4542. Golab is the true idealist of all the Death Angels. he is a simple being,
  4543. devoted to his master and his work. He is the Master Torturer, the end all
  4544. and be all of torment. He takes joy in his work, of this there an be no
  4545. doubt, but he is also proud of his work, and of his loyalty to Astaroth.
  4546. His love of his work is matched only by his hatred of those like Thaumiel
  4547. who have betrayed the One True Lord of Hell. He struggles against the
  4548. rebellious Death Angels constantly, seeking a way to overcome their power.
  4549. He enjoys Astaroth's favor, although not even he is permitted into The Dark
  4550. Spire now that Astaroth is gone. The Dark Lord's support has allowed him to
  4551. amass quite a collection of souls for his own experiments, as well as an
  4552. army of demons and fallen humans willing to fight for their lord's vision
  4553. of Inferno.
  4554.  
  4555. Golab's citadel is a monument to efficiency and art in torture. The Death
  4556. Angel has carefully organized his vast complex of torture chambers,
  4557. separating them by a detailed classification system of his own devising.
  4558. Millions of different kinds of torments are performed there every day by
  4559. the hordes of Razides and Excrucies working under The Master Torturer's
  4560. guidance. All the tortures of the Nine Circles are well represented here,
  4561. along with scores of others never even thought of outside of Golab's realm.
  4562. The very air is thick with agony, and Golab's lust for pain permeates. Anyone,
  4563. whether they be human or demon, entering the citadel is
  4564. soon overcome by the desire to do harm.
  4565.  
  4566. This unavoidable side effect of entering Golab's private domain means that
  4567. most humans will soon become fascinated with the tortures that are taking
  4568. place around them. Rather than keeping their minds on their goal (whatever
  4569. it may be), many harrowers will foolishly stop and take a closer look at
  4570. some particularly fascinating bit of torture. Seeing the agony it produces
  4571. so effectively, they will then be overcome with the urge to try it out
  4572. themselves, usually on one of their friends. In some rare cases, the
  4573. feelings are reversed, and humans have been known to become overwhelmed
  4574. with a desire to be tortured. They will literally fling themselves onto a
  4575. Razide's rack, begging to be flayed or whipped.
  4576.  
  4577. In the Wild Zones, Golab's citadel usually takes the form of a tremendous
  4578. steel building, resembling in many ways a hospital or scientific facility.
  4579. High walls, edged with razors, spikes, and barbed hooks surrounds the
  4580. building, with Razide and even human guards patrolling it at all times.
  4581. Golab does not like the moving citadels so popular with some of his fellow
  4582. Death Angels. At his heart, the Torturer prefers things to remain ordered
  4583. and rational. To him, torture is as much a science as an art, and much of
  4584. the joy comes from executing his techniques flawlessly. As busy as he is in
  4585. his constant struggles with Thaumiel and others, he still finds time to
  4586. take a personal interest in some of his subjects.
  4587.  
  4588. Many of those humans Golab has snared for his Citadel are those who were
  4589. once torturers of some sort themselves. Golab offers them guidance or help
  4590. when they are alive, perhaps helping them escape the police, or showing
  4591. them assure fire technique for inflicting unspeakable pain. In return these
  4592. depraved men and women give up their souls forever. In recent times, Golab
  4593. has taken a particular interest in fostering the piercing and body
  4594. mutilation movement that has grown so popular in certain segments of
  4595. western society. The fascination with pain and metal is something Golab can
  4596. well appreciate.
  4597.  
  4598. Golab is a diligent pursuer of souls, and he has acquired a great many test
  4599. subjects over the years. The fact that Astaroth favors him somewhat has
  4600. helped in this, since the Dark Lord will occasionally give the Death Angel
  4601. some human guinea pigs in order to keep him loyal and happy. Golab also has
  4602. a very large following among the Razides, Nepharites, and other Infernals,
  4603. many of whom feel that Golab offers the best hope for a steady supply of
  4604. human victims in the years to come. The number of demons in his service is
  4605. unknown, but it is thought that many of Astaroth's servants fled the Dark
  4606. Spire for Golab's citadel, and it would not be surprising to find several
  4607. billion of the demons locked away in the citadel somewhere, jealously
  4608. guarding their human captives.
  4609.  
  4610. Given his rather scientific, almost rational bent, it is not surprising
  4611. that Golab is in the forefront of the attempts to raise awakened humans in
  4612. Inferno. He feels sure that the right combination of tortures, when coupled
  4613. with the right human, will have the synergistic effect necessary for
  4614. awakening. He prefers those with a high tolerance for torture. The most
  4615. promising subjects are even allowed breaks from their own agony so that
  4616. they may have an opportunity to torture others for a while. The Death Angel
  4617. feels that inflicting pain is almost as important as receiving pain in his
  4618. attempt to bring out the inner divinity in man.
  4619.  
  4620.  
  4621. Togarini's Lost Citadel
  4622.  
  4623. Poor, ruthless, ambitious Togarini, brought down by his own hubris. Once he
  4624. was Astaroth's right hand, leader among the Death Angels, protector of
  4625. Death Magicians. When the Demiurge withdrew, Astaroth grew despondent, and
  4626. Togarini, in a rather uncharacteristic blunder, thought that he himself was
  4627. great enough to overthrow his sovereign lord. Obviously, he was sadly
  4628. mistaken, his rebellion miss-timed. Perhaps if he had waited, joined forces
  4629. with his rival Thaumiel, then something could have been done. As it is, he
  4630. was extremely lucky to escape Inferno at all.
  4631.  
  4632. Now he lives in human form in our world, his power in Inferno lost to him.
  4633. His Citadel, once one of the mightiest of the ten, is now little more than
  4634. a gaping hole running through the depths of The Pit. Already, local demon
  4635. lords have encroached on the fallen Death Angel's former territory,
  4636. building their own citadels in place of his. In the Wild Zones there is no
  4637. sign of him, the fleets of black ships that sailed through Inferno's skies
  4638. under his flag are now long gone. Even his Razides have for the most part
  4639. disappeared from Inferno. A few managed to make their way into Elysium with
  4640. their master. The rest Astaroth destroyed.
  4641.  
  4642. There is now little cause for visiting the site of Togarini's fallen
  4643. citadel. Once it was a place where the souls of dead conjurers came to
  4644. learn demonic magicks at Toagarini's feet. The place was a haven for
  4645. intelligence and reason in an otherwise insane land. Togarini's citadel was
  4646. one of the few places in all of Inferno where an accomplished death
  4647. conjurer could travel without fear of being molested or spurned. Togarini
  4648. treated us all like his pupils, demanding nothing more from us than our
  4649. respect. Now that ancient academy of the Lore of Death lies in ruins.
  4650.  
  4651. Most ironic of all was that Togarini was on the verge of actually awakening
  4652. one or more of his human pupils. The lores of magic are a key to our
  4653. divinity. when we reigned as gods, magic was our birthright, and we wielded
  4654. it with confidence and authority. Togarini experimented with some of the
  4655. most avante guard magical techniques known in the universe, coupling them
  4656. with all seven of the great occult sciences. He hoped to create an army of
  4657. the awakened, all of whom were beholden to him for their power. Together
  4658. they would overthrow Inferno, Metropolis, and Elysium, establishing a new
  4659. world of magic, with Togarini at its head. Sadly, he did not wait for his
  4660. dream to become a reality, and so, in his haste, he fell.
  4661.  
  4662. Rumors remain about what happened to his most gifted pupils. While I feel
  4663. that many of them were misguided in putting their faith in a Death Angel
  4664. instead of themselves, there can be no doubt that these men and women were
  4665. some of the greatest conjurers in existence, dead or living. It is hard to
  4666. believe that none of them escaped Astaroth's wrath, although not
  4667. impossible. Signs point to at least one survivor, possibly even an awakened
  4668. human who has taken over part of Togarini's fallen citadel. He or she seems
  4669. to have set themselves up as a demon lord, perhaps even possessing the body
  4670. of a powerful Razide. Whoever this person is, their influence is growing
  4671. ever stronger, and spreads throughout the lower five Circles of The Pit.
  4672. This is an accomplishment no mere Razide has ever been able to achieve
  4673. before now, and is just one sign pointing to the possible divine origins of
  4674. these so-called "demon lord".
  4675.  
  4676. Whoever it is, they are being very careful, and their exact whereabouts
  4677. remain a mystery. Known in the Pit simply as Quiri-yek, the demon lords
  4678. servants seem to be everywhere, but few have seen the demon itself. Most
  4679. strange of all, Quiri-yek seems less concerned with gaining control over
  4680. human souls than it does over gaining territory and establishing a base of
  4681. support among the Infernals. This is behavior most unusual for a Razide, no
  4682. matter how far sighted it is. There has even been some speculation that
  4683. Quiri-yek is in fact Togarini himself, working in secret to reestablish his
  4684. position in Inferno. Others say that the Demon lord is so interested in
  4685. acquiring territory because it seeks the lost arcane library that once
  4686. resided in Togarini's citadel. Whether or not the fallen Death Angel took
  4687. his tomes with him remains a mystery who's answer is known only to Togarini
  4688. himself. What is certain is that, at some point, Quiri-yek will be forced
  4689. to show its hand as it draws the attention of some of the more powerful
  4690. Death Angels.
  4691.  
  4692.  
  4693. Hareb-Serap's Citadel
  4694.  
  4695. The dark angel of war, Hareb-Serap, most trusted of Astaroth's general,
  4696. greatest rival to Thaumiel and Golab. No one can deny he is powerful,
  4697. cunning, and dangerous. What is surprising is that he is also loyal, or at
  4698. least more loyal than most of his cousins. Hareb-Serap commands two of
  4699. Astaroth's Legions in Elysium, and prepares for the day when the war on
  4700. humanity begins in earnest. However, Thaumiel's revolt also occupies his
  4701. attention, and he struggles to find the resources for a war on two fronts,
  4702. a struggle that has forced him into a unlikely alliance with his other
  4703. rival: Golab. Despite the barriers between him and his goal, The Raven of
  4704. the Battlefields remains confident in his hopes for victory. Togarini is
  4705. already gone, and only two more stand between him and ascendant over
  4706. Inferno, under Astaroth of course.
  4707.  
  4708. The dark general's citadel is an armed camp, with many close ties to the
  4709. goings on in Circle
  4710. Seven. Unlike many of the other citadels, Hareb-Serap's contains a great
  4711. man wide open areas where battles can be fought and re-fought without end.
  4712. The Death Angel takes great pleasure in war, enjoying it on both a visceral
  4713. and intellectual level. Certainly there are few general in the history of
  4714. time who have fought more battles or who have had greater military minds.
  4715. Hareb-Serap specializes in corrupting soldiers, policemen, and anyone else
  4716. even remotely trained in combat. In the old days, when he was less
  4717. distracted by Infernal politics, he spent a great deal of time wandering
  4718. humanity's battlefields, offering victory or the death of one's enemies in
  4719. return for the soldiers' souls. Many took him up on the offer, and now some
  4720. of the greatest military minds in history languish in his citadel. Some of
  4721. these he uses as opponents to sharpen his own skills and those of his
  4722. Razide generals. Others become generals themselves, helping to lead the
  4723. Dark Legions in Inferno and Elysium.
  4724.  
  4725. Hareb-Serap's citadel is one of the largest moving geographic features in
  4726. the entirety of the Wild Zones. It typically appears as a city sized
  4727. juggernaut, moving across the landscape on mechanical legs and treads,
  4728. weapons of every sort covering its entire surface. Dominating this
  4729. landscape of death are gigantic cannons, the barrels of which are hundreds
  4730. of yards long, and at least thirty feet in diameter. They fire shells the
  4731. size of missiles, filled to the brim with explosives created by Hareb-Serap
  4732. himself. At least some of the weapons re almost always firing, pouring
  4733. death and destruction into the surrounding countryside. Sometimes the crew
  4734. fires for practice, other times at unseen enemies, and sometimes just for
  4735. the joy of seeing and hearing the resulting explosion. The juggernaut and
  4736. Thaumiel's floating fortress have often clashed, but no definite victor
  4737. ever emerges.
  4738.  
  4739. Hareb-Serap has never been much for needless torture (although he has no
  4740. problem with needless violence). He prefers to drill his charges almost to
  4741. the point of exhaustion, honing them into razor sharp fighters. The Raven
  4742. of the Battlefields has always put his army first and foremost, rather than
  4743. any considerations of tormenting his charges. The humans in his custody may
  4744. disagree, but they do not realize how good they have, even compared to the
  4745. never ending warfare of the Seventh Circle. Hareb-Serap will actually
  4746. promote those who prove themselves, offering one of the only chances in all
  4747. Inferno of upward advancement for humans.
  4748.  
  4749. Humans who do make their way into Hareb-Serap's citadel immediately fall
  4750. into his mindset. There is an overwhelming need to do violence. Warfare is
  4751. the only answer to any problems. Killing in combat is a joy to be cherished
  4752. always. An overpowering, gung-ho, bloodlust permeates the whole citadel.
  4753. Unlike Thaumiel's realm, there is no carefully organized system of ranks
  4754. here. These are all grizzled veterans, each of whom knows exactly what they
  4755. have to do and are eager to do it. they exist for the fight and nothing
  4756. more or less will satisfy them. There are to be certain leaders, but they
  4757. only have the authority because they have proven themselves capable of
  4758. handling it. They have shown that when others obey their commands, victory
  4759. is the inevitable result. Once a leader fails to obtain that victory, he or
  4760. she loses their place, becoming once again a soldier.
  4761.  
  4762. This practice of elevating humans may stem from the grudging respect
  4763. Hareb-Serap has or their military minds. It may also be a rather novel
  4764. attempt to awaken some of them, or at least to partially tap into
  4765. humanity's divine power. The Death Angel would dearly love to have an
  4766. awakened human in his arsenal, especially with the rumors about that
  4767. Thaumiel already has one such being at his disposal. He views them as the
  4768. nuclear weapons of Inferno (he has plenty of normal atomic weapons), a
  4769. force one cannot afford to be without and still hope to be considered a
  4770. super power.
  4771.  
  4772.  
  4773. Samael's Citadel
  4774.  
  4775. Samael is a strange lonely figure in the constant infighting among the
  4776. Death Angels. He is powerful enough that he could, if he wished it, make a
  4777. bid for supreme power, but he is so committed to his own, internal goals,
  4778. that he stays aloof from the conflict that rages around him. He obeys
  4779. Astaroth, I only to avoid the annoyance that comes with disobedience.
  4780. Samael concerns himself with one thing only; revenge.
  4781.  
  4782. Vengeance is an almost holy rite for Samael, and in this he is almost a
  4783. being of principal, something unheard of down below. He believes firmly
  4784. that revenge is a fundamental law of existence, something to be respected,
  4785. honored, and most importantly, obeyed. It is in part this fanatical sense
  4786. of vengeance that holds back the other Death Angels who might otherwise be
  4787. inclined to interfere in his affairs. They know that should they cross The
  4788. Avenger, he will come after them with all his power until one or the other
  4789. of them is totally annihilated.
  4790.  
  4791. Samael has always been close to humanity, and had already spread his
  4792. tendrils far and wide among us before Astaroth stepped in and began to so
  4793. actively meddle with the affairs of the living. Samael can sense the rage
  4794. that wells up inside men when they find themselves suffering from
  4795. injustice. The need for revenge calls out to the Death Angel, and he tries
  4796. to answer as often as he can. Humans tend to have such strong emotions,
  4797. such passionate hatreds, that it they are easily swayed to violence and
  4798. damnation. Countless times a lovers spat will lead to one murdering the
  4799. other. Every day someone just gets fed up with the law and takes justice
  4800. into their own hands. These are the men and women Samael seeks out.
  4801.  
  4802. Once he has them, they live out the rest of existence paying for their
  4803. moment of passion. for now there is someone new who needs avenging, the
  4804. murderer becomes the victim, standing trial and being executed countless
  4805. times for taking their vengeance on another. Samael sees no hypocrisy in
  4806. this, or if he does, he certainly does not care. The wheel of fate always
  4807. comes full circle. Samael takes special delight in fostering vendettas
  4808. between rival families or groups. He lends his aid to both sides, drawing
  4809. them further and further into the blood feud, until eventually both sides
  4810. are destroyed, their souls now the sole property of The Avenger. He then
  4811. lets them fight out the vendetta over and over again across time, a never
  4812. ending cycle of vengeance.
  4813.  
  4814. Samael has little respect for human institutions of law and punishment, and
  4815. so he mocks them constantly in the form and structure of his citadel.
  4816. Courtrooms, law offices, and prisons make up the vast majority of the
  4817. citadel, but none of them function as they were intended in our world. The
  4818. judges and juries are either Razides, or more likely human souls who have
  4819. been in Inferno long enough to be entirely corrupted by Samael's paradigm.
  4820. They tend to create the laws and rules of court as they go along, while the
  4821. lawyers simply spout off nonsense, or argue incessantly about trivial
  4822. points, never coming to the point. All the while the poor accused sits and
  4823. waits, not knowing what his fate will be, vainly hoping that somehow he
  4824. might be acquitted. He never is. Juries have made up their minds before
  4825. they ever enter the courtroom. They spend their time thinking of what
  4826. terrible punishment the guilty man will be sentenced to.
  4827.  
  4828. Samael's citadel manifests itself as The Palace of Justice in the Wild
  4829. Zones; a sprawling baroque building covered with monumental carvings of
  4830. Samael himself meting out punishment to the wicked in a never ending cycle
  4831. of vengeance. The Palace of Justice has many entrances, and is open to any
  4832. who would enter. However, unless one is already an appointed judge, lawyer,
  4833. or juror, it is assumed that you are guilty as soon as you mount the wide
  4834. marble steps. Anyone straying into the Palace is liable to be ushered
  4835. directly to some courtroom, tried, and found guilty. Then they are sent
  4836. below, where the multitude of punishments are carried out over and over
  4837. again.
  4838.  
  4839. Samael is not known to have become involved in any efforts for creating
  4840. awakened humans to serve his cause. The concept seems to hold no interest
  4841. for him. He is a simple being, with a one track mind: punishment and
  4842. vengeance. All his ambition aims towards these goals. He constantly extends
  4843. his power in Elysium, but only so that he may bring more souls down to his
  4844. citadel for vengeance.
  4845.  
  4846.  
  4847. Gamaliel's Citadel
  4848.  
  4849. There is tasteless and then there is Gamaliel. He is not what one would
  4850. consider the most refined of demons, and in fact revels in his own
  4851. baseness. this is not to say that he cannot act refined and civilized. In
  4852. fact he loves more than anything to coat his perversions with a thin veneer
  4853. of proper society and etiquette. At his care however, he is little better
  4854. than a sex obsessed adolescent. Of course only the most vicious, sadistic,
  4855. and destructive forms of sexual expression interest him, but what would one
  4856. expect from a lord of hell? He exists in isolation from the other Death
  4857. Angels, even more so than Samael. Like The Avenger, he is absorbed in his
  4858. own passions, and finds the conflict between his brethren to be entirely
  4859. too distracting.
  4860.  
  4861. Gamaliel seeks to pervert normal pleasures in any way he can imagine, and
  4862. thus has equipped his citadel with every known sexual and torture device
  4863. known to history. For The Perverted Sexuality, there is no line between
  4864. pain and pleasure, no sex without violence. The two are forever inseparable
  4865. in his realm. Any being entering the Citadel feels an animal lust rise up
  4866. within them, filling their every thought with images of violent, invasive
  4867. intercourse. Nothing short of the full perversions of Gamaliel's vision
  4868. will satisfy these unnatural hungers: leather whips, iron hooks, bladed
  4869. phalluses, and boiling wax call out to even the most puritanical of men.
  4870.  
  4871. Wandering through the citadel is like wandering through a pornographic
  4872. movie studio gone mad. All manner of congress abounds, with demons and
  4873. humans mixing their pleasure with wild abandon. Gamaliel seeks out those
  4874. poor lost fools who put physical pleasure before all other things. The
  4875. perverts, nymphomaniacs, and rapists of the world call out to him and he
  4876. here's their call. He lures their souls to his realm with promises of
  4877. forbidden pleasures and undreamed of delights, and nearly all the time they
  4878. are seduced by his promises. Many willing give their lives for just a taste
  4879. of Gamaliel's perversity. It is rumored (although unsubstantiated) that as
  4880. many as a third of the souls in Gamaliel's citadel sacrificed themselves to
  4881. the Death Angel in a ritual of auto-erotic asphyxiation.
  4882.  
  4883. The citadel of Gamaliel has no set incarnation in the Wild Zones. The Death
  4884. Angel prefers to alter the appearance and location of the citadel
  4885. constantly, hoping to ensnare others into his pleasure pits. The appearance
  4886. often molds itself to the viewer's desires, becoming whatever it is that
  4887. entices and titillates them the most. Once inside there are few beings,
  4888. infernal or human, that can resist the temptations of the citadel, and once
  4889. you partake of its pleasures, there is no going back.
  4890.  
  4891. Any conjurer versed in the Lore of Passion will tell you that there is
  4892. power in the act of sex. Power that can lead one to enlightenment and maybe
  4893. even awakening. Gamaliel seems to be trying to use this power to awaken
  4894. some of his subjects, although there have been no reports of his having
  4895. much success. I have it on the authority of a cultist devoted to Gamaliel
  4896. that the Death Angel has high hopes for such a human. He hopes to send the
  4897. awakened back into Elysium as a sort of messiah for perversion, spreading
  4898. across the planet his message of unbridled, violent sexuality.
  4899.  
  4900.  
  4901. Nahemoth's Citadel
  4902.  
  4903. Nahemoth is an interesting character, someone who intrigues me more than
  4904. almost any other Infernal being. Like all Death Angels, he is a being of
  4905. immense power, even though he is the weakest of his kind. He seems to carry
  4906. with him no ambition, no lust for power, pleasure, or souls. Perhaps he
  4907. hopes merely to lead by example. The personification of self doubt, self
  4908. loathing, and self denial, Nahemoth has chosen to opt out of existence,
  4909. succumbing entirely to his own raison d'etre.
  4910.  
  4911. Why the change? While he may never have been truly ambitious, Nahemoth was
  4912. always a collector of souls, just like his cousins. He sought out those who
  4913. had given up on life, who felt that the world had lost its meaning. He
  4914. offered to prove them right, giving them an escape from the drudgery of
  4915. life. He encouraged suicide among his followers, catching the departing
  4916. souls in his web and dragging them down to Inferno for an eternity bleaker
  4917. than their life ever could have been.
  4918.  
  4919. The change seems to have come around the same time the Demiurge withdrew, a
  4920. watershed date to be sure. Nahemoth seems to have discovered that there was
  4921. no real point to the futile exercise of gathering the souls of the hopeless
  4922. and depressed. What did he care? What did it matter? Consumed by his own
  4923. self doubt and loathing, he simply stopped, retiring in upon himself, alone
  4924. in his citadel.
  4925.  
  4926. His Razides fled from him, his servant abandoned him. He sits alone
  4927. somewhere, pondering the futility of it all. This sudden withdrawal left a
  4928. large number of souls suddenly free in Inferno. Nahemoth certainly cared
  4929. not at all as to whether they stayed or left. Many of them left, emboldened
  4930. by their new found freedom. Of course most of them were immediately
  4931. snatched up by other Death Angels or lesser Infernal Lords. They fled the
  4932. citadel, not knowing the horrors that awaited them in The Pit and the Wild
  4933. Zones. Some remain, too far drawn into the apathy that permeates Nahemoth's
  4934. citadel. They sit and wait, paralyzed by self doubt into inactivity. Over
  4935. the years, the air of apathy has grown so strong in the citadel, that it is
  4936. now almost impossible to summon up the will or energy to do anything once
  4937. one has passed through its gates. Even Infernals succumb to its drudgery,
  4938. and so the citadel is seldom if ever visited anymore.
  4939.  
  4940. There is another explanation for Nahemoth's suddenly changed that has been
  4941. posited more than once. Some say that Nahemoth may have succeeded where all
  4942. others are said to have failed. Somehow, in the oppressive climate of
  4943. apathy, a human soul managed to transcend it chains of doubt and awaken.
  4944. Such a man would have to be very strong willed indeed, if the story is
  4945. true. It is said that Nahemoth was so overcome with despair that such a
  4946. wondrous event should take place in spite of his dark influence that he
  4947. gave up right then and there, conceding the war to the humans once and for
  4948. all. The story has a certain appeal, but it is after all just a story.
  4949.  
  4950.  
  4951. Astaroth
  4952.  
  4953. Naturally enough, no book whose subject claims to be Inferno itself can
  4954. neglect discussing the Lord of Hell himself. I have mentioned more than
  4955. once that I try to stay out of the affairs of the Death Angels and their
  4956. master. These beings can destroy even a mage as powerful as myself with
  4957. little more than a thought. Not that they themselves cannot be harmed in
  4958. turn, but it takes a brave and foolish soul to cross paths with them.
  4959. Having said this, I now admit that, despite my own misgivings I have in
  4960. fact crossed paths with the dreaded Astaroth on more than one occasion.
  4961. Fortunately for myself, my role in these encounters has always been that of
  4962. an observer, not of one who interferes in Infernal affairs. I present here
  4963. my remembrances of one such experience.
  4964.  
  4965.  
  4966. Miranda
  4967.  
  4968. As I have noted before, Astaroth has all but abandoned his creation,
  4969. focusing his attentions on the affairs of the living. Having bodily entered
  4970. our world along with his Death Angels and Infernal Legions, Astaroth still
  4971. found himself in need of human servants to bolster his strength in Elysium.
  4972. For millennia Astaroth has used cults to cultivate an army of human
  4973. followers. Such satanic or infernal sects have always been a part of human
  4974. society, although usually their membership was small, their influence
  4975. nearly insignificant. Since the Prince of Darkness entered our world, these
  4976. cults have grown by leaps and bounds. Astaroth's existence on our plane
  4977. allows him to directly spread his influence to a great many willing
  4978. individuals. Once Astaroth was limited to providing his worshipers small
  4979. insights into magic or the service of a minor demon for a while. Now the
  4980. Dark Lord himself can be present with his cults, possessing their leaders
  4981. and revealing a part of his true self. It is probably safe to say that
  4982. there are now a thousand times more Satanists on Earth than were present a
  4983. hundred years ago.
  4984.  
  4985. This figure may seem startling to some, especially those who do not realize
  4986. just how insidious the Dark Lord can be. Certainly the worship of Astaroth
  4987. as Satan has grown over the last hundred years, and satanic cults now claim
  4988. record numbers. However, Satan is only one of the many forms Astaroth is
  4989. wont to assume, and there are literally thousands of cults around the world
  4990. devoted to his various avatars. Sometimes these cults are devoted to
  4991. flagrantly evil ends: death cults, hellers, doctors bent on causing pain,
  4992. and so forth. As often as not however, Astaroth hides his true nature
  4993. behind a mask of good, or if not good, then some sort of secular front.
  4994. Examples include such diverse groups as millennial cults, radical Christian
  4995. groups, so-called "hippie" love communes, racist and ultra-nationalist
  4996. organizations, radical environmentalist groups, and so on. This is not to
  4997. say that all such groups are actually fronts for satanic worship. The fact
  4998. is that it is almost impossible to distinguish between a group controlled
  4999. by Astaroth, and one that is not. The members seldom realize the true
  5000. nature of their leaders, nor the true goals of their organization. Astaroth
  5001. corrupts them gradually, preying on their innate fears and desires until
  5002. they have come to far on the path of darkness to turn back.
  5003.  
  5004. The story of Miranda details one such cult, a cult centered around a little
  5005. girl whose followers believed her to be a new prophet of Christ. Although
  5006. none of them realized it at the time, and I only came to realize it later,
  5007. young Miranda Thomas had in fact been possessed by Astaroth himself, who
  5008. was now using her to form a new cult dedicated to his service. Miranda was
  5009. born on December 25th, 1968, to parents Crystal Johnson and Robert Buckley.
  5010. Crystal and Robert were living together at the time in Toronto, Robert
  5011. having fled the draft in his native America. He met the young Canadian
  5012. Crystal on a commune. The girl was at the time only 14, and it was two
  5013. years later that she gave birth to Miranda. The father had long ago fled
  5014. the commune as soon as it became obvious that Crystal intended to raise the
  5015. baby instead of aborting it or putting it up for adoption.
  5016.  
  5017. Miranda grew up on the commune, at least for the first five years of her
  5018. life. In 1974 the commune broke up, and Crystal took her daughter west to
  5019. Vancouver. Crystal had slipped from her idealistic youth into a
  5020. disenchanted life of prostitution, drug addiction, and abusive lovers. Over
  5021. the next four years, Miranda grew up in an increasingly hostile home
  5022. environment. Her mother died of a drug overdose in 1975, and Miranda went
  5023. into foster care. A year later she was adopted by a radical Christian
  5024. family who took pity on her. Frederick and Ellen Johnson were incapable of
  5025. having children, but had adopted seven other unfortunate orphans before
  5026. Miranda. They gave their children a very strict, Christian fundamentalist
  5027. upbringing. In 1977, they bought a farm in Idaho and transplanted the
  5028. entire family there, setting up their own church and preaching to the
  5029. locals.
  5030.  
  5031. It was at this point that Miranda began exhibiting strange behavior. She
  5032. was suddenly able to quote exactly any verse from the bible, even though
  5033. her reading skills were well below average for her age. Likewise, she began
  5034. to spend hours everyday in silent prayer, a fact that made a great
  5035. impression on her adoptive parents. When Miranda started seeing visions of
  5036. Christ on a weekly and then daily basis, the Johnsons knew that they had
  5037. been blessed. In 1978 Miranda began to start speaking prophecies and giving
  5038. sermons to all who would listen. Word of this amazing girl spread
  5039. throughout the radical Christian community of the American west, and soon
  5040. devotees from all over where coming to the small Idaho farm to hear what
  5041. the young prophet had to say.
  5042.  
  5043. This was the beginning of the cult that I came across in early 1984. By the
  5044. time I got there, Miranda had become the mistress of all she surveyed. All
  5045. of her followers, including her parents, worshipped her as a messenger of
  5046. God on Earth. She had a core following of between seventy-five and a
  5047. hundred men and women, as well as some twenty children whose parents forced
  5048. them into following Miranda. The small Idaho farm had been converted into a
  5049. large compound where all of the followers lived. They worked the fields,
  5050. raised animals, and tried to be as self-sufficient as possible. They did
  5051. not use electricity or any other modern conveniences, and were effectively
  5052. isolated from the rest of the world, except through their missionaries.
  5053. Every few months Miranda would send out ten or twenty of her followers to
  5054. go and try and recruit more worshipers into the cult. Although they seldom
  5055. converted anyone, there were those who were persuaded into coming to view
  5056. the cult and were instantly swayed by the force of Miranda's personality
  5057. and "holiness."
  5058.  
  5059. I came to the farm after having heard several rather convincing accounts of
  5060. the young girl giving accurate prophecies and even performing miracles. My
  5061. first thought was perhaps this girl had somehow become Awakened and was not
  5062. yet aware of her true abilities and potential. The advantages of gaining
  5063. access to a newly Awakened human are too numerous to list here, but you can
  5064. imagine why I might be interested in such a find. Thus I made the journey
  5065. across the Atlantic and into the wilds of Idaho, a most forbidding and
  5066. primitive place in my personal estimation. I came to the farm in the guise
  5067. of a penitent pilgrim, hoping to catch a glimpse of this wondrous
  5068. prophetess.
  5069.  
  5070. Having asked around among the local populace I discovered that most of the
  5071. local residents had a relatively positive impression of Miranda's cult, now
  5072. officially referred to as the Visionary Church of Christ. The congregation
  5073. of the Visionary Church were generally a very positive group, never causing
  5074. any trouble, and even helping out the local community when they could. They
  5075. were known for their acts of charity, their kindly ways, and unassuming
  5076. nature. I went into the situation somewhat off guard, believing the tales
  5077. told by the rustic locals I had interviewed.
  5078.  
  5079. The compound was not fenced off, and was hardly what I expected. It was
  5080. little more than a series of wooden shacks built up on an extensive tract
  5081. of farm land. In the center of it all was the Church itself. The building
  5082. had once been the home of the Johnson family, but Miranda had long ago
  5083. ordered that the whole building be gutted and turned into a church
  5084. facility. I was welcomed with open arms and warm smiles, the cult members
  5085. being extremely friendly. I told my lies and eventually was allowed to come
  5086. to one of the Church's services. The service proved to be nothing out of
  5087. the ordinary, and I saw nothing particularly surprising or intriguing about
  5088. the so-called prophetess.
  5089.  
  5090. As the congregation began to file out, the girl called to me, asking me to
  5091. stay behind and talk with her. Somewhat surprised by this move, I readily
  5092. agreed, curious as to what the girl might have to say to me. She was small
  5093. for her age and dangerously thin, her simple yellow dress hanging loosely
  5094. from her shoulders. In other circumstances she might have been pretty, but
  5095. here she appeared merely sickly. She obviously saw little of the sun, and I
  5096. suspected that she seldom if ever left the church building. I approached
  5097. her and bowed before her as I had seen others do.
  5098.  
  5099. She nodded and placed her hand on my head, offering me a blessing. She drew
  5100. her hand back quickly as if she had been burned. She looked at me with a
  5101. rather dangerous look in her eye, and I thought for a moment that she might
  5102. call for help. Instead her shocked look turned to a smile, and then a
  5103. sneer. She motioned for me to have a seat. I was not sure what was going
  5104. on, but I was curious enough to see the situation to its end. What was
  5105. going on here? I sat in the front pew, waiting for her.
  5106.  
  5107. She turned her back to me and strode purposefully up to the altar. She
  5108. stood in front of the simple wooden table for a moment, as if gathering her
  5109. thoughts or possibly praying for guidance. She turned then, fixing her gaze
  5110. on me. Finally she spoke.
  5111.  
  5112. Who are you? What do you want?"
  5113.  
  5114. I began to spin my tale that I had prepared for the occasion, only to be
  5115. cut off by a shrill screech from the young woman who stood before me. "No
  5116. more lies!" she yelled at me, "Who are you?" I was silent for a moment,
  5117. studying her, wondering how she could have guessed that I was lying. I
  5118. certainly looked the part, having dressed in the simple clothes of the
  5119. American penitent: jeans and a T-shirt. I tried to insist that I was
  5120. telling the truth, hoping to elicit another bout of outrage from her. If I
  5121. could get her angry enough, maybe she would let something slip.
  5122.  
  5123. She obviously saw right through my tactic, and instead of yelling she
  5124. simply sighed. As if reading my thoughts, she turned away and began to
  5125. speak. "It's the truth you want is it? Well Mr. Tyree, I'm not sure you are
  5126. ready for the truths I have." I was naturally shocked. I had of course
  5127. given a false name and there was no way that she could have known my true
  5128. identity. I had already cast spells of protection to keep her from
  5129. interfering with my thoughts or reading my mind. I stood up, aghast,
  5130. thinking perhaps that I should kill the child where she stood.
  5131.  
  5132. She preempted any action on my part however. "Please sit down conjurer.
  5133. You know not what you do, nor who you are dealing with." Her voice had
  5134. changed. It had dropped in pitch and was now full of malice and an almost
  5135. evil self-assurance. I sat down, although my hand crept down to the cuff of
  5136. my jeans, reading the knife I had strapped to my calf. The girl walked back
  5137. over to me and looked at me for a long moment. I had trouble meeting her
  5138. eyes, my gaze wandering around the church, looking for possible exits.
  5139.  
  5140. "Calm yourself Shelby. I will not harm you now, nor will I keep you here
  5141. against your will. I know your work, I know that you are merely a scholar
  5142. interested in learning the truth about me and my subjects. I know too that
  5143. you have cheated death's curse on more than one occasion, an admirable feat
  5144. for which I give you all the credit you are due. You came here looking for
  5145. answers, and I am here to give them to you."
  5146.  
  5147. Now I knew. There was no denying it, and I wondered how I ever could have
  5148. missed something so painfully obvious. Now that I knew the truth radiated
  5149. from her like a signal fire. Wave after wave of hate, despair, cunning,
  5150. bloodlust, and simple evil poured off the girls. How could I have been so
  5151. blind? How could her congregation have missed the fact that it was Astaroth
  5152. himself who stood in their very midst every day! Of course I knew the
  5153. answer as soon as I asked the question. I only knew now because she wanted
  5154. me to know. Astaroth can hide within the body of a saint if he wants to.
  5155. All disguises are within his power for he is the Prince of Lies.
  5156.  
  5157. Again she spoke. "Now you realize what you have stumbled upon don't you
  5158. Shelby? Now you know that your existence continues only at my discretion.
  5159. You are face to face with he whom you have feared all your many lives, the
  5160. Lord of Death, Destroyer of Knowledge. Don't worry little mage, I will let
  5161. you go with your memories intact. Truth of the matter is, I want you to
  5162. tell my story, for there are few in your world who could tell it with more
  5163. credibility. Would you care to hear me out Shelby? Would you like to know
  5164. of my doings here in Idaho and beyond?"
  5165.  
  5166. I nodded mutely, my attention captured by this waif of a girl who spoke
  5167. with Satan's words.
  5168.  
  5169. "This girl has been mine since the day she was born, her mother having
  5170. bartered the child's soul away long before it was conceived. From that
  5171. moment I began laying the groundwork for my plans, I would be born again
  5172. into the world in the body of this child, as I had been born into the world
  5173. in countless other children. I prefer to incarnate myself at the moment of
  5174. conception, for it gives me tremendous power later in life. By the time
  5175. such children reach maturity I have dominated their souls to such an extent
  5176. that I can cause them to awaken without losing control of them. You know as
  5177. well as I that there are few forces in existence more powerful than an
  5178. awakened human. Thus I chose the fetus as my vessel of choice.
  5179.  
  5180. Miranda is now on the verge of becoming truly awakened, and then her latent
  5181. power will join with mine. The small cult you see here will blossom and
  5182. grow tenfold in the next few years, as more and more hopeless souls are
  5183. drawn to her and her power. All the while I shall preach to them the word
  5184. of their false God, drawing them deeper and deeper into the net. I will
  5185. turn the religion in upon itself, until this faithful flock doesn't know
  5186. which way is up. Christian Love in the eighties will become rabid hate and
  5187. intolerance in the nineties. These peaceful Christians will be the base of
  5188. a militant crusade to cleanse their beloved nation of undesirables: Jews,
  5189. homosexuals, Muslims, blacks, liberals, any prejudice I can foster I will.
  5190. As the millennium closes the Visionary Church of Christ will take up arms
  5191. under the leadership of their great prophetess Miranda.
  5192.  
  5193. Nor will they be alone. Nor is Miranda alone. Across this country and
  5194. around the world I have been reborn into similar bodies. In the United
  5195. States Miranda will find other parts of my soul in the hearts of militia
  5196. leaders, skinheads, terrorist groups, Zionist groups, and any other
  5197. militant force this country can muster. They will join with nationalists
  5198. and racists in Europe and the far east. Groups from across the world will
  5199. come together to form an army of hate ready to tear down the establishment,
  5200. led by me in all my many forms. Of course they will not be alone in the
  5201. fight, for my Legions of the Damned will be right there with them. Hundreds
  5202. of thousands of hell's finest lie scattered across the globe, waiting for
  5203. the time to march upon Elysium and burn it to the ground.
  5204.  
  5205. Who will oppose them? Who can stop such a force? Of course you know the
  5206. answer. Not the long lost Demiurge, nor the quarrelsome Archons. Who will
  5207. stop them? I will of course. For I am in the heart of government, the
  5208. center of the establishment. My soul has been born time and again into the
  5209. fetus of the future politician, the one day general, the president. I am
  5210. among them all, and I will do everything I can to crush those who would
  5211. overthrow order and civility. Civilization looks to it leaders for guidance
  5212. and protection when the radical fringe rises up, and who better to give
  5213. them hope than me?
  5214.  
  5215. Of course there is a limit how far I can spread my soul around the world. I
  5216. cannot be everywhere at once, nor do I need to. There are plenty of people
  5217. in this world of yours who are more than willing to serve me of their own
  5218. free will. I get offers every day, more and more offers as time goes on and
  5219. mankind begins to lose all semblance of hope for a brighter future. Both
  5220. young and old turn to me in desperation, hoping for some sign that there is
  5221. more to life than they know. As always, I am there to hear their pleas, to
  5222. offer them guidance in their time of need. In return they must give me
  5223. their constant and never-ending devotion. Thus have I spread my net far and
  5224. wide across the world, and soon I shall begin to draw it tight.
  5225.  
  5226. More than one being has commented to me that my web of devotees is not
  5227. unlike a spy network. Certainly most of my agents fit the description of
  5228. spies. They live their lives as they normally would, going to their jobs at
  5229. newspapers, in the schools, at churches, in the military, and at the stock
  5230. exchange. They pass the days in silent devotion, waiting until they are
  5231. called upon to prove their loyalty to me and my cause. Their friends and
  5232. family never suspect, never dream that their loved one worships Satan
  5233. himself, and so it should be. Every so often they come together to make
  5234. sacrifice and honor me in some ritual of their devising. Such pleasantries
  5235. are irrelevant to me. They exist because they help keep my servants in
  5236. line, not because I gain anything from them.
  5237.  
  5238. These spies come from so many different sources, are devoted to so many
  5239. different aspects of me, that it they none of them are aware of all the
  5240. other spies out there. Only I know the true extent of my network of agents.
  5241. Only I realize just how far my power has extended into the world. Not even
  5242. the most loyal of my Death Angels can imagine how extensive the network has
  5243. become in the last half century. The seeds of chaos have been planted, the
  5244. sprouts have sprung up, and soon they will begin to bloom in all their
  5245. glory. War, hate, and savagery will tear this planet apart. The coming
  5246. chaos will fill the coffers of hell again, so much so the hell itself will
  5247. spill over into Elysium, consuming the entire world. Then only Metropolis
  5248. shall remain free from my power, and that only for a short time.
  5249.  
  5250. I see that I have shocked you Tyree. I see that this was not what you
  5251. expected. Nevertheless, it is the truth. Now I bid you go my friend. Our
  5252. time has not come yet, although it will soon enough. Leave me to my
  5253. faithful congregation and be gone. Do not return." With that she turned
  5254. back to the altar. I rose to my feet and walked from the church, and kept
  5255. walking to my car. I did not stop driving until I had hit the state border.
  5256.  
  5257.  
  5258. Searching For the Truth
  5259.  
  5260. As much as Astaroth had revealed to me in his diatribe, he had given me no
  5261. real details. I believed him as far as he went however. If Astaroth has the
  5262. time to be in a small church in Idaho, his influence no doubt extends into
  5263. many other small corners of the world. I have since that time spent many
  5264. months and years searching for the truth in what "Miranda" told me. My
  5265. inquiries have, of necessity, been discreet, accomplished through agents
  5266. and intermediaries. I am loathe to cross paths with the Beast directly. The
  5267. results have been less than encouraging however. Everywhere I turn, there
  5268. are signs of the Dark Lord's influence. They are not easy to discern, these
  5269. signs, but they are unmistakably there if you know where to look. I present
  5270. here a few examples of what I have learned through my endeavors cults,
  5271. groups, and individuals in high places all devoted to Astaroth in one of
  5272. his many incarnations.
  5273.  
  5274. Italian Freedom Front, Milan Italy
  5275.  
  5276. In recent years the northern Italian cities have grown more and more
  5277. resentful of the rest of Italy. Almost all of Italy's industrial base
  5278. resides north of the Po river, while the largest drains on the Italian
  5279. economy are in the south and in Sicily. Throughout the north support for a
  5280. divided Italy has grown rapidly. The North wishes to split Italy into two
  5281. or more semi-independent regions, effectively making the south fend for
  5282. itself. This is one of the most volatile issues in Italian politics, an
  5283. always volatile environment. Not surprisingly, wherever one finds strife,
  5284. it is likely that Astaroth or his agents are not far away.
  5285.  
  5286. The Italian Freedom Front is ostensibly the brain child of one Giorgio
  5287. Bennetti, a businessman and manufacturer from Milan. He founded the front
  5288. in 1991 in reaction to the ever growing tax burden on him and his company.
  5289. According to his rhetoric, he was tired of sending all of his money south
  5290. to Rome where it was divided between those who didn't want to work, the
  5291. corrupt politicians, and the Mafia. The Front soon gathered a moderate
  5292. following among small business owners and a few of the more prominent
  5293. Industrialists. Over the past five years it has grown increasingly larger,
  5294. to the point where it has significant political clout in the region.
  5295. Members of the front pay dues and make donations that go towards achieving
  5296. the goal of a Federated Italy, with the North free from the tax burden and
  5297. corruption of Rome.
  5298.  
  5299. Behind the facade of concerned businessman lurks the true face of Bennetti,
  5300. who is in fact not only an agent of Astaroth, but is in fact an incarnation
  5301. of the dread Prince of Lies. Bennetti has been secretly using a portion of
  5302. the Front's funds to pay for the training of a private terrorist army.
  5303. Bennetti uses the army to destabilize the government in Rome and generally
  5304. worsen division throughout Europe. They also serve as assassins when
  5305. Bennetti finds himself confronted with a political rival who will not
  5306. succumb to threats or bribery.
  5307.  
  5308. The Front's military wing has close ties to Astaroth himself, and all of
  5309. them are devoted Satanists. Many of the army's leaders have become powerful
  5310. death conjurers under Astaroth's direct tutelage. Astaroth's ultimate goal
  5311. is uncertain, but I think it is fair to assume that he wants nothing less
  5312. than to insight civil war within Italy, a war that he hopes would have
  5313. grave repercussions throughout Europe and the rest of the world.
  5314.  
  5315. Freedom's Voice, Beijing
  5316.  
  5317. China remains one of the most powerful and oppressive nations on the face
  5318. of the Earth. However, the age old country is also much to stable for
  5319. Astaroth's liking. Even though some might find Communism evil or the work
  5320. of the Devil, Astaroth himself has no political allegiances. He is and
  5321. agent of chaos and destruction. As repressive as the Communist regime might
  5322. be, it is nothing compared to the glory days of the raging civil wars that
  5323. have wracked the Chinese mainland in the past. The new hope for chaos and
  5324. instability in China lies in the burgeoning student pro-democracy movement,
  5325. and it is not surprising to find Astaroth himself right in the middle of it.
  5326.  
  5327. Freedom's Voice is an underground newspaper published and distributed by
  5328. the radical elements of the Beijing academic community. The editor in chief
  5329. is none other than the dark lord himself, born into the flesh of Ling Wei,
  5330. a twenty-five year old radical. Ling Wei lives in hiding, now wanted by the
  5331. police for questioning in several matters. No one outside of the movement
  5332. has seen him in several years, although he is purported to have been at the
  5333. scene of several student demonstrations. He is revered as a national hero
  5334. by those who would seek to change the face and heart of China. There have
  5335. been numerous stories about Ling Wei in western papers, and in America
  5336. their is a fund set up to take donations to help Ling Wei's cause.
  5337.  
  5338. From his hiding place deep in Communist China, Ling Wei directs a small
  5339. company of radicals and terrorists bent on overthrowing the Communist
  5340. regime. Naturally, all of these individuals have become worshipers of
  5341. Astaroth, and it is not uncommon for Razides and members of the Damned
  5342. Legions to accompany the radicals on their missions of terror. The fact is
  5343. that China is subject to a great deal of terrorism from within, but few if
  5344. any of these attacks are ever reported in the West, due to the tight hold
  5345. the government keeps on the press. Ling Wei's support is much greater than
  5346. Beijing would have the world believe. No doubt Astaroth hopes to make the
  5347. move to open rebellion sometime soon, aided by covert support from the west
  5348. as well as the Legions of the Damned.
  5349.  
  5350. Randy Hughes, Los Angeles
  5351.  
  5352. Many would argue that the United States of America is the leading force in
  5353. the world today, and where it goes the world will follow. Granted, most who
  5354. would make such an argument are Americans, but there is a certain amount of
  5355. truth in the sentiment. Certainly America is a prize worth fighting for on
  5356. any level, and Astaroth has focused a lot of his attention on the world's
  5357. only remaining super power. Fortunately for the lord of Inferno there is a
  5358. great deal of fertile ground for his works in the United States.
  5359.  
  5360. I have already described in detail my encounter with Miranda's church in
  5361. Idaho, and you can be assured that Astaroth has inserted his tendrils into
  5362. hundreds of other churches and religious organizations around the country.
  5363. Astaroth understands very well just how divisive religion can be among
  5364. humans, especially Americans where there are so many competing beliefs at
  5365. play. Aside from the hallowed halls of religion, Astaroth has extended his
  5366. influence into other tender parts of the American underbelly, most
  5367. particularly the hyper-sensitive issue of racism.
  5368.  
  5369. The racial division in the Untied States cuts deep into the American
  5370. psyche, and it has amazing power to disrupt the ordered social contract
  5371. U.S. citizens have grown accustomed. The city of Los Angeles remains one of
  5372. the centers of racial tension in the States, and it is not surprising that
  5373. we find Astaroth himself involved in the heart of the issue. Surprisingly,
  5374. Astaroth operates under the guise of peacemaker, one who's ostensible goal
  5375. is to bring the people of America together. Randy Hughes is one of the most
  5376. powerful figures in African-American politics in America, although few
  5377. people know his name. He prefers to remain behind the scenes, setting up
  5378. meetings, brokering agreements, and staging media events. There is hardly a
  5379. black leader on the west Coast who does not owe Hughes a favor or two, and
  5380. on one in the country who does not respect him (assuming they know him).
  5381.  
  5382. The fact that Hughes is in fact an incarnation of the Devil himself seems
  5383. to have been lost on his many supporters. Hughes is a very insidious form
  5384. of the Lord of Hell, different from the other incarnations I have discussed
  5385. here. He is not building up an army, nor does he have large numbers of
  5386. worshipers or followers. As far as I am able to discern the man works
  5387. entirely on his own. However, he has maneuvered himself into such a
  5388. position of authority and influence that he has a tremendous amount of
  5389. power at his influence. He is seen as the great voice of moderation within
  5390. the modern African American community. Hughes constantly works to mollify
  5391. the radical elements of the black community, building bridges of
  5392. understanding between blacks and whites.
  5393.  
  5394. Or at least he tries to build bridges. Unfortunately things always seem to
  5395. fall apart at the last minute, despite Hughes' best efforts. Everyone gives
  5396. him great credit for his work, and looks to him for guidance, yet he seldom
  5397. seems to accomplish much, a fact lost on his admirers. Hughes will soon
  5398. maneuver himself into a position where he can step from behind the scenes
  5399. and assume the leadership of the moderate black community in America.
  5400. Astaroth will then be in a position to do great harm whenever the mood
  5401. strikes him, simply by switching his position. If even the great peacemaker
  5402. Randy Hughes agrees that there will be no racial peace in America, then
  5403. millions will follow him into chaos.
  5404.  
  5405.  
  5406. Hell on Earth
  5407.  
  5408. These three are the only examples I can conclusively give. The evidence in
  5409. each case is overwhelming, and their can be no doubt that what I have said
  5410. is true, at least for now. I do not doubt that once this work is published
  5411. Astaroth will become aware of its existence. When this happens he may well
  5412. change tactic or even come after me himself, but I doubt it. I do not
  5413. delude myself, the readership of this work will be small, and even a
  5414. smaller percentage will choose to let themselves believe what I have
  5415. written here. This small work is of no concern to the Lord of Hell.
  5416.  
  5417. Take with you this final thought on Astaroth and his plans for the world. I
  5418. can only make one generalization about Astaroth: no generalizations are
  5419. possible. There are a great many stereotypes about the devil and the nature
  5420. of evil in the world and none of them are true. More accurately, none of
  5421. them are entirely true. Astaroth is not a creature of pure evil, he is not
  5422. the embodiment of all that is bad. He is a being of tremendous power and
  5423. unfathomable complexity. His motives are as multifaceted as any humans, and
  5424. probably more so. Nor can his methods be confined to any particular
  5425. patterns or rules. He will do anything, go anywhere to achieve his goals.
  5426. That does not make him evil, but it does make him extraordinarily
  5427. dangerous. All the more dangerous because of what his ultimate goal is. He
  5428. wants hell on Earth and nothing less, and if you have read this far you
  5429. know that is not a consummation devoutly to be wished.
  5430.  
  5431.  
  5432. Epilogue
  5433.  
  5434. It think it only fitting that my work end with the citadels of the Death
  5435. Angels. They are certainly the most dangerous places in Inferno for a
  5436. traveler. Always remember that in its citadel a Death Angel controls
  5437. reality, down to the very emotions you feel and thought you think. This is
  5438. not necessarily true for the rest of Inferno. Often you have only your own
  5439. heart and mind to rely on in order to make it through whatever ordeal hell
  5440. throws up against you next. In the citadels you cannot even count on that.
  5441.  
  5442. I find myself somewhat sad as I write these final words. This book has been
  5443. decades upon decades in the making, and still it comes down to just a few
  5444. pages. Why should this be? I could fill the text with all the accounts of
  5445. hell I have accumulated over the years. Certainly those accounts fill every
  5446. nook and cranny in the room I now sit. But what would be the point? I have
  5447. waded through these tales of unending human misery, and I can assure you,
  5448. they paint a depressing picture. It is enough for my readers to know what
  5449. kind of horrors lie below, and since no authoritative catalog could ever be
  5450. completed, I decided not to try.
  5451.  
  5452. This turns out to have been a kind of manual or guide for those who would
  5453. seek fame or fortune in the furthest reaches of hell. I would hope that
  5454. most would take it as a warning to give up such vainglorious dreams, but
  5455. failing that I hope they will at least take my warnings to heart. I have
  5456. represented here every kind of horror and threat that I know to exist in
  5457. Inferno, and there are certainly a great many. Likewise there are no doubt
  5458. many more, and one should always expect the unexpected.
  5459.  
  5460. Forgive an old man his ramblings. It is time to bring this to a close. I
  5461. would wish that you should never have need of this book, but I firmly
  5462. believe that you, no matter who you are, will find value in it. Every day
  5463. that we do not fight for our souls, we lose a little more of them to the
  5464. darkness. Remember. Always remember. Remembering is what They hate more
  5465. than anything.
  5466.  
  5467.  
  5468. Appendices
  5469.  
  5470. About the Author
  5471.  
  5472. Inferno: An Authoritative Study, is the product of decades of research on
  5473. the part of one of the world's best known Death Conjurers: Shelby Tyree.
  5474. Tyree was born in Boston in 1720, the child of two conjurers well versed in
  5475. the Lores of Passion and Death. It is said that they assured for their
  5476. child the soul of a long dead ancestor, a famous European conjurer from
  5477. Renaissance Italy. Raised in a tradition of magic, and taught early on of
  5478. his divine rights as a human being, Shelby quickly excelled at both the
  5479. magical arts and the occult sciences.
  5480.  
  5481. He remained a loyalist during the revolutionary war, and fled to Jamaica
  5482. when it became obvious that the Colonies would soon throw off their
  5483. masters. He spent several decades in the Caribbean, and was rumored to have
  5484. engaged in piracy on more than one occasion. After the Napoleonic wars he
  5485. relocated to Europe, where he spent the next hundred or so years, learning
  5486. all he could from the greatest conjurers of the day. Renowned for his
  5487.  
  5488. magically enhanced longevity, and social graces, Tyree was the enfant
  5489. terrible of the conjuring social scene for many years.
  5490.  
  5491. But the ambitious magician had more than immortality on his mind when he
  5492. began his exhaustive study of Inferno. He felt that he could make a
  5493. contribution to human society, maybe even help overthrow the power of
  5494. Astaroth himself. So he withdrew from society, devoting his full attentions
  5495. to the study of the world of the dead. So, decades later, we see the fruits
  5496. of his labors in this finely researched, well documented account of hell:
  5497. "A tour guide for the afterlife." as Tyree himself once called it.
  5498.  
  5499. Tyree published the book at his own expense, with a first print run of
  5500. 1,000 copies. Printed on high quality, acid free paper, the book is meant
  5501. to last for centuries. Bound in hand tooled leather, sprinkled liberally
  5502. with diagrams, engravings, and even color prints, the book was an instant
  5503. collectors item in occult circles. Tyree, being a generous man, gave away
  5504. several hundred copies to friends and associates around the world. He
  5505. handles sales himself, preferring not to deal with any traditional book
  5506. selling venues. Those interested in obtaining a copy should attempt to
  5507. contact the author directly. He currently resides in the greater New York
  5508. metropolitan area.
  5509.  
  5510. Shelby Tyree as an NPC
  5511. Game masters may want to include the opinionated and enigmatic Tyree in
  5512. their campaign. He can be an excellent ally or antagonist for any group of
  5513. players, depending on how the game master wishes to use him. He is a very
  5514. arrogant, opinionated man, but also very polite. He has his own agenda,
  5515. only some of which is revealed in his book. He would gladly use the players
  5516. as pawns in his schemes against the Death Angels, sending them on dangerous
  5517. missions, even into Inferno itself, in exchange for information or possibly
  5518. teaching the player characters magic. He may even contact the players
  5519. himself if he thinks they could prove valuable allies or agents.
  5520.  
  5521. When playing Tyree always act very urbane and distinguished. He never loses
  5522. his temper, nor shows any surprise. He will laugh politely at other
  5523. people's jokes, and listen attentively to their stories. He is the perfect
  5524. host, and has a way of gaining others' trust very quickly. He speaks with a
  5525. slightly European accent when in America, an affectation on his part that
  5526. increases his charm. in fact he is a talented linguist, and speaks eight
  5527. different languages as if he were a native.
  5528.  
  5529. Stats for Shelby Tyree
  5530.  
  5531. AGL: 15
  5532. STR: 12
  5533. CON: 24
  5534. COM: 15
  5535. EGO: 25
  5536. CHA: 17
  5537. PER: 16
  5538. EDU: 16
  5539.  
  5540. Height: 170 cm
  5541. Weight: 68 kg
  5542. Movement: 8m/rnd
  5543. Actions: 2
  5544. Initiative Bonus: +3
  5545. Damage Bonus: +2
  5546. Damage Capacity: 6 scratches = 1 light wound
  5547. 5 light wounds = 1 serious wound
  5548. 3 serious wounds = 1 fatal wound
  5549. Endurance: 140
  5550. Mental Balance: -40
  5551. Dark Secrets: Family Secret
  5552. Advantages: Influential Friends, Magical Intuition
  5553. Disadvantages: Egoist
  5554. Skills: Handgun: 14, Sword: 13, Unarmed Combat: 10 First Aid: 15,
  5555. Astrology: 25, Alchemy: 26, Voodoo: 30, Tarot: 15, Cabbalah: 23, Symbols:
  5556. 18, Numerology: 20, Languages: English: 20, French: 20, German: 18,
  5557. Italian: 18, Dutch: 15, Spanish: 20, Latin: 20, Hebrew: 20, Greek: 20, Net
  5558. of Contacts: Death Magicians: 30, Satanists: 15.
  5559.  
  5560. Magic: Lore of Death: 60 (all spells at 25), Lore of Passion: 20, Lore of
  5561. Madness: 15, Lore of Time & Space: 15
  5562.  
  5563. Home: New York
  5564.  
  5565.  
  5566. Using Inferno in your Campaign
  5567.  
  5568. Inferno and the Kult Campaign
  5569.  
  5570. Inferno offers quite a few opportunities for game masters to liven up their
  5571. games, but only if the setting is used judiciously. Inferno is the source
  5572. of so many of the antagonists players are likely to come up against:
  5573. Satanists, death conjurers, Razides, the Death Angels, and even Astaroth
  5574. himself. It is only natural to think that at some point the players
  5575. characters might try to take the fight to their enemies' home turf.
  5576. Nevertheless, Inferno should remain a mystery to the players. Even more
  5577. importantly, he it should remain threatening, even horrifying for them. The
  5578. decision to go to Inferno should never be undertaken lightly; after all,
  5579. their characters' souls are at stake here.
  5580.  
  5581. Trips to Inferno should occur very rarely, so as not to become passé.
  5582. Players are most frightened in situations they are not familiar with, so
  5583. whenever they become familiar with Inferno's threats, those threats lose
  5584. their potency. Nothing in Inferno should ever be what the players expect it
  5585. will be. Corridors move, laws of physics change, demon lords are replaced
  5586. by others. Novelty, confusion, and shock are the keys to a successful
  5587. Inferno experience.
  5588.  
  5589. It is also important to realize that it can be hard for players to feel
  5590. sympathetic fear for their characters if they cannot picture the horrors
  5591. that confront them. That is why so much of what is described in this book
  5592. walks a fine line between our world and the fantastic. Everyday situations
  5593. taken to horrible extremes are easier to imagine than bizarre situations
  5594. the players cannot relate to. Thus the betrayal of a friend, or the death
  5595. of a loved one often carries more emotional impact than facing some larger
  5596. than life monster with gnashing teeth and fiery breath. We've all been
  5597. betrayed, or at least suffered from a fear of losing someone or something
  5598. we hold dear. Few of us can really picture what it would be like to fight a
  5599. dragon; it is simply beyond our experience.
  5600.  
  5601. Thus many of Inferno's torments are firmly grounded in human experience.
  5602. They are familiar situations taken a step further. Keep this in mind when
  5603. creating torments and encounters of your own in Inferno. Look closely at
  5604. your players and their characters, and think about what would make them
  5605. most uncomfortable. Do you have a player who is scared to death of spiders?
  5606. Confront them with hordes of the little arachnids somewhere along the line
  5607. as they journey through Inferno. does a character have a dead sister who's
  5608. ghost still haunts him? Bring that spirit into Inferno, confront the
  5609. character with her. The dead sister does not attack. We all know what to do
  5610. when we are attacked. Instead she tells her brother that she loves him,
  5611. that she's sorry. She begs to know why he convinced her to commit suicide.
  5612. That is a horrifying experience most people and characters will have
  5613. trouble dealing with.
  5614.  
  5615. It is paramount that any Inferno experience be as frightening,
  5616. disheartening, and gut-wrenching as possible. Once it is over, the players
  5617. should absolutely dread the thought of ever returning their again. That
  5618. will make it all the worse for them when they do have to go back, or worse
  5619. yet, when they are brought back against their wishes. Every journey to
  5620. Inferno should cost more than is gained That is the nature of the place.
  5621. Even if the players go in with the hope of great rewards, and even if they
  5622. get those rewards, they should come away feeling that it was not worth it.
  5623. The price they pay is always too great. Inferno is a force of implacable
  5624. despair in the universe, and no good can come from dealing with it. Not
  5625. that the players will know or believe this. They will try, and they will
  5626. learn what it means to harrow hell.
  5627.  
  5628. There are a variety of ways Inferno can be integrated into a Kult campaign.
  5629. We divide them here into two rather broad categories: Accidental and
  5630. Intentional. Accidental is the more common way of entering Inferno. After
  5631. all, anyone who takes a moment to ponder things rationally should realize
  5632. that voluntarily going to hell is a bad idea. Intentional harrowings should
  5633. be quite rare, and are the stuff of extended campaigns that take several
  5634. game sessions. they are often misguided quests of some sort, and are almost
  5635. universally ill-fated from inception. This of course makes them all the
  5636. more fun to play.
  5637.  
  5638. Accidental entries include temporary portals opening up around the
  5639. characters, being kidnapped by Razides, and getting lost wandering through
  5640. the Labyrinth. These Infernal explorations are usually about trying to find
  5641. a way home again and nothing more. They make for good, quick, nasty
  5642. interludes in a campaign that maybe needs a little spicing up.
  5643. There should be plenty of danger, excitement, and non-stop action: a
  5644. desperate race against time. Temporary portals between Elysium and Inferno
  5645. open up all the time, and are the perfect opportunity to give the players a
  5646. small taste of Inferno. It is a nice ironic touch to make the opening of a
  5647. portal the direct result of something the players have done. For example,
  5648. the players manage to fight off a number evil cultists attacking a school
  5649. full of children. The resulting carnage, fear, and suffering is enough to
  5650. open a temporary portal that manages to get the players and the children
  5651. stuck in Inferno and trying to find a way out.
  5652.  
  5653. Intentional journeys into Inferno should come from the players, although
  5654. the game master might well provide the impetus. Classic reasons for
  5655. harrowing hell include: recovering the souls of lost loved ones, taking
  5656. vengeance on a particular death angel, finding information known only to a
  5657. dead person, seeking some artifact rumored to be in hell, or fulfilling a
  5658. quest given to the players by some other being. The journey should be
  5659. fraught with peril, sorrow, and hopelessness. It is against all odds that
  5660. the players might come out of it with their souls intact. They know it is a
  5661. bad idea, but circumstances offer them no choice. These are games of high
  5662. melodrama and tension, and the game master needs to work extra hard to keep
  5663. up the appropriate mood.
  5664.  
  5665. Some Important Game Conventions
  5666.  
  5667. Dying
  5668.  
  5669. The most important game convention to keep in mind when running a game set
  5670. in Inferno is what happens to characters when they die. Its really quite
  5671. simple: they stay in Hell. Souls that leave the body in Inferno do not move
  5672. from their current location. Dying in Inferno is the same for all humans: a
  5673. few moments, hours, or days later (depending on the will of local demon
  5674. lords and the game master) the body is fully regenerated. If the character
  5675. was alive before he came to Inferno, he is now dead.
  5676.  
  5677. What does it mean to be dead? Most importantly, your soul is no longer
  5678. attached to your body, and a soul needs a body to exist in Elysium.
  5679. Characters dying for the first time will have an odd experience: their
  5680. physical body will remain where it fell, a lifeless hunk of flesh. The
  5681. character's soul will literally step out of that body and appear next to
  5682. the corpse. For all intents and purposes it is as if the character has two
  5683. bodies. The new body functions just like the old one, and the character is
  5684. unaware of any differences. The only problem is, if the character should
  5685. try to leave Inferno with their new body, they will be prohibited. The
  5686. character cannot step through portal, nor effect the other side in any way.
  5687. His souls is lost forever, unless a death conjurer or some other being
  5688. reincarnates him with by magical means.
  5689.  
  5690. Dying in Inferno also means that the character is out of the loop of
  5691. reincarnation. They will not ever receive a new body, unless they can
  5692. somehow figure out a way to get themselves into the memory purging process
  5693. of the Nine Circles. This is easier said than done, since most demons will
  5694. see the player character for what he is, and choose to hold on to him
  5695. rather than offer him hope of returning to the living world some day. This
  5696. can result in some interesting deal making. The demon might demand that the
  5697. player character find another soul to take his place. In return the
  5698. character will be allowed to undergo years of torture before he finally
  5699. escapes Inferno's clutches.
  5700.  
  5701. Laws of Physics
  5702.  
  5703. The Game master should feel free to play fast and loose with the laws of
  5704. physics and time and space. Guns can misfire, fire backwards, or not fire
  5705. at all. Gravity can suddenly switch direction, parallel lines can meet, two
  5706. objects can occupy the same place at the same time, and so on. This is a
  5707. great tool for keeping the players off guard, but only as long as the game
  5708. master uses them with subtlety. The characters may not even be aware of
  5709. what is happening until it is too late. Likewise, the amount of time that
  5710. passes for the players probably has no correlation to the flow of time in
  5711. Elysium. years of torment can take a few minutes of Greenwich Mean time. In
  5712. Inferno, it truly is all relative.
  5713.  
  5714. Last Words
  5715.  
  5716. Inferno is more malleable than most game settings. The game master is free
  5717. to do whatever he or she can dream up, for as Tyree has said so often in
  5718. his book, anything is possible in Inferno. we encourage the game master to
  5719. go wild with Inferno. Do not hold back, do not pull any punches. Inferno is
  5720. the worst place imaginable in all of the already nasty Kult universe. Make
  5721. it the worst place your player characters have ever been as well. Make them
  5722. hate you for ever bringing them there. They'll thank you later.
Add Comment
Please, Sign In to add comment